1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
18 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
20 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
21 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
22 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
23 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
25 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
29 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
30 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
32 % for customized page headers/footers
33 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
35 % change header rule width
36 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
38 % used to have extra space in table cells
39 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
40 {\usepackage{array}}{}
41 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
43 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
44 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
45 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
47 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
50 \use_default_options false
55 \maintain_unincluded_children false
57 \language_package default
60 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
61 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
62 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
63 \font_math "auto" "auto"
64 \font_default_family default
65 \use_non_tex_fonts false
68 \font_sf_scale 100 100
69 \font_tt_scale 100 100
71 \default_output_format pdf2
73 \bibtex_command bibtex
74 \index_command default
78 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
79 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
83 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
84 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
85 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
90 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
91 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
94 \use_package amsmath 1
95 \use_package amssymb 1
98 \use_package mathdots 1
99 \use_package mathtools 0
100 \use_package mhchem 1
101 \use_package stackrel 0
102 \use_package stmaryrd 0
103 \use_package undertilde 0
105 \cite_engine_type default
109 \paperorientation portrait
113 \notefontcolor #0000ff
130 \paragraph_separation skip
132 \quotes_language english
135 \paperpagestyle default
136 \tracking_changes false
137 \output_changes false
151 by the \SpecialChar LyX
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
160 Documentation mailing list:
161 \begin_inset CommandInset href
163 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
174 \begin_inset Newline newline
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Note Note
185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
193 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
201 \begin_layout Standard
202 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
203 LatexCommand tableofcontents
210 \begin_layout Chapter
214 \begin_layout Section
215 What is \SpecialChar LyX
219 \begin_layout Standard
221 is a document preparation system.
222 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
223 scripts, publishable books, business
224 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
225 It is unlike most other
226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
233 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
235 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
251 pt type, left justified, 5
252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
281 's philosophy: most importantly,
282 the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
298 \begin_layout Standard
299 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
300 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
302 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
303 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
309 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
310 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
312 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
313 only a vertical scrollbar.
314 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
315 The first case is large images.
316 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
317 image and use the option
328 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
331 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
332 this doesn't work for equations yet.
335 \begin_layout Standard
336 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
337 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
345 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
352 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_layout Standard
357 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
359 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
361 Just select the manual you want to read from the
368 \begin_layout Section
369 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
373 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
382 can be configured via the menu
384 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
388 \begin_inset Index idx
391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
398 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
400 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 packages are available.
402 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
404 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
406 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
411 \begin_inset space \space{}
414 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
415 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
417 To force \SpecialChar LyX
418 to re-inspect your system, you should use
420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
424 \begin_inset Index idx
427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
428 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
434 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
435 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
438 \begin_layout Section
441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
443 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
450 \begin_layout Standard
451 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
452 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 installed, but you will not be
454 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
455 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
456 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
457 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
458 document can always be output as plain text
462 \begin_layout Standard
463 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 or DocBook classes or packages.
465 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
466 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
472 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
475 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
483 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
484 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 \begin_inset Note Note
494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
495 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
496 Code box prevent that the term
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
505 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
506 More about \SpecialChar TeX
507 Code is described in section
512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
514 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
518 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 is explained in section
524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
526 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
546 See section 5.1 of the
550 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
554 \begin_layout Chapter
555 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
559 \begin_layout Section
560 Basic File Operations
561 \begin_inset Index idx
564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
573 \begin_layout Standard
578 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
579 in addition to some more advanced operations:
582 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
620 arg "buffer-new-template"
626 \begin_layout Itemize
648 \begin_layout Itemize
658 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
706 arg "buffer-write-as"
712 \begin_layout Itemize
726 \begin_layout Itemize
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
742 a few minor differences.
745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
756 command lists the available templates.
757 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
758 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
759 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
767 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
774 \begin_layout Standard
775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
807 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
808 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
809 is just that — a big, blank space.
817 \begin_layout Standard
838 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
843 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
846 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
864 will reload the document from disk.
865 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
866 and want to restore it to the last save.
875 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
876 them as your changes.
879 \begin_layout Section
880 Basic Editing Features
881 \begin_inset Index idx
884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
893 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
900 \begin_layout Standard
901 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
902 can perform cut and paste operations
903 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
904 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
905 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
906 editing features and how to access
908 We will start with cut and paste.
911 \begin_layout Standard
912 As you might expect, the
916 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
917 various other editing features.
918 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
922 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 \begin_layout Itemize
966 \begin_inset Index idx
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset Index idx
1007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1032 \begin_layout Itemize
1036 \begin_inset space ~
1042 \begin_layout Itemize
1046 \begin_inset space ~
1052 \begin_layout Itemize
1056 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_inset space ~
1066 \begin_inset Index idx
1069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1078 \begin_inset Index idx
1081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1096 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1106 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1112 \begin_layout Standard
1113 The first three are self-explanatory.
1114 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1115 and other programs by
1136 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1137 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1142 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1143 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1144 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1145 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1146 into individual cells.
1150 \begin_inset space ~
1155 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1156 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1160 \begin_layout Standard
1164 \begin_inset space ~
1169 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1171 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1186 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1187 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1188 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1194 \begin_inset space \space{}
1197 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1198 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1204 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1223 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1224 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1226 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1235 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1236 start a new paragraph.
1237 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1238 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1246 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1266 paste from the primary selection.
1267 This is normally the currently selected text.
1270 \begin_layout Standard
1273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1297 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1303 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 button to skip the current word.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1338 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1340 If the toggle is set, searching for
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1352 will not match the word
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 Match whole words only
1369 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1370 to only find complete words, e.
1371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1400 offers also an advanced
1403 \begin_inset space ~
1407 \begin_inset space ~
1412 feature that is described in sec.
1413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1419 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1427 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1428 \begin_inset space \space{}
1432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1440 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1442 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1447 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1454 \begin_layout Standard
1458 arg "inset-select-all"
1461 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1462 When the cursor is inside an inset
1465 arg "inset-select-all"
1468 selects the content of the inset.
1472 arg "inset-select-all"
1475 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1480 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1483 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1487 \begin_layout Section
1489 \begin_inset Index idx
1492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1499 \begin_inset Index idx
1502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1511 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1518 \begin_layout Standard
1519 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1521 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1524 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1527 or the toolbar button
1533 to undo some mistake.
1534 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1539 or the toolbar button
1546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1553 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1557 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1560 \begin_layout Standard
1561 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1570 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1571 This is a consequence of the 100
1572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1575 step undo limit mentioned above.
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1587 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1589 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1593 \begin_layout Section
1595 \begin_inset Index idx
1598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1607 \begin_layout Standard
1608 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1611 \begin_layout Enumerate
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1621 once anywhere in the edit window.
1622 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 \begin_layout Itemize
1638 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1644 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1645 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1648 \begin_layout Itemize
1649 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1652 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1659 \begin_layout Enumerate
1660 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1664 \begin_layout Standard
1665 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1666 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1670 \begin_layout Section
1672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1674 name "sec:Navigating"
1679 \begin_inset Index idx
1682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1691 \begin_layout Standard
1693 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1696 \begin_layout Itemize
1701 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1702 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1705 \begin_layout Itemize
1706 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1708 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 \begin_inset space ~
1715 or by the toolbar button
1718 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1725 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1727 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1730 and use the same menu to return to them.
1731 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1734 \begin_layout Standard
1738 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1743 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1744 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1751 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1752 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1753 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1754 your last editing position.
1757 \begin_layout Standard
1762 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 \begin_layout Subsection
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1770 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1777 \begin_layout Standard
1778 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1779 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1780 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1792 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1804 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1808 \begin_layout Standard
1809 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1810 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1811 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1812 dialog and to modify the citation.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1818 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1819 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1827 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1830 \begin_layout Standard
1831 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1832 you further to control the display.
1837 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1838 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1844 option keeps it in the current view state.
1845 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 3, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1862 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1867 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1877 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1887 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1888 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1902 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1903 So, for example, you can move section
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1911 2.4 or after section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1917 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1930 (or the corresponding key bindings
1938 ) you can change the level of sections.
1939 So you can for example make section
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1954 \begin_layout Section
1955 Input/Word Completion
1956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1958 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1963 \begin_inset Index idx
1966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1973 \begin_inset Index idx
1976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2007 \begin_layout Standard
2009 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2011 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2012 is used to propose completions.
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2016 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2019 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2024 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2040 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2044 \begin_inset space ~
2049 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2050 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2060 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2061 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2062 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2063 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2066 \begin_layout Standard
2068 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2069 completions available.
2074 key to accept a proposed completion.
2075 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2076 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2077 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2084 \begin_layout Standard
2085 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2086 ing options for text.
2087 The special math option
2091 enables characters to be composed.
2092 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2093 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2096 , you can then input the characters
2097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 to a formula to get it.
2109 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2110 of the math toolbar.
2111 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2115 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2116 's installation folder.
2117 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2126 \begin_layout Section
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_inset Index idx
2173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2204 \begin_layout Standard
2205 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2219 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2222 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2226 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2233 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2244 \begin_inset space ~
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2273 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2277 \begin_layout Labeling
2278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2282 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2283 LatexCommand nomenclature
2285 description "Tabulator key"
2291 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2293 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2300 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2307 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2311 , especially section
2312 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2318 reference "subsec:Lists"
2324 If you are still confused, look in the
2329 \begin_inset Newline newline
2337 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2338 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2342 \begin_layout Labeling
2343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2347 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2348 LatexCommand nomenclature
2350 description "Escape key"
2357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2364 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2365 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2368 \begin_layout Labeling
2369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2375 \begin_inset space ~
2379 \begin_inset space ~
2386 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2387 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2391 \begin_layout Standard
2392 There are three modifier keys:
2395 \begin_layout Labeling
2396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2414 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2415 LatexCommand nomenclature
2417 description "Control key"
2421 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2422 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2426 \begin_layout Itemize
2435 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2438 \begin_layout Itemize
2447 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2450 \begin_layout Itemize
2459 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2463 \begin_layout Labeling
2464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2482 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2483 LatexCommand nomenclature
2485 description "Shift key"
2489 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2490 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2493 \begin_layout Labeling
2494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2512 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2513 LatexCommand nomenclature
2515 description "Alt or Meta key"
2519 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2520 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2521 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2527 \begin_inset Newline newline
2530 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2532 menu accelerator keys
2535 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2536 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2540 \begin_layout Standard
2541 For example, the sequence
2542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2558 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset space ~
2591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2601 \begin_layout Standard
2606 manual lists all other things bound to the
2614 \begin_layout Standard
2615 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2617 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2618 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2619 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2620 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2621 The \SpecialChar LyX
2622 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2623 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2624 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2626 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2642 followed by a capital
2649 \begin_layout Chapter
2652 \begin_inset Index idx
2655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2665 \begin_layout Section
2667 \begin_inset Index idx
2670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2679 \begin_layout Subsection
2683 \begin_layout Standard
2684 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2685 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2686 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2687 numbering schemes, and so on.
2688 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2689 and format the title of your document differently.
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2697 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2698 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2699 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2700 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2701 picks one for you by default.
2702 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2705 \begin_layout Subsection
2707 \begin_inset Index idx
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2719 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2726 \begin_layout Standard
2727 You can select a class using the
2729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2734 \begin_inset Index idx
2737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2744 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2752 \begin_layout Standard
2753 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2758 \begin_layout Description
2759 Article for basic articles
2762 \begin_layout Description
2763 Report for basic reports
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Book for writing a book
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Letter for US-style letters
2774 \begin_layout Standard
2775 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2776 only uses if you have installed
2777 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2778 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 distributions will include
2781 Here are some of the classes.
2782 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2784 Special Document Classes
2793 \begin_layout Description
2794 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2809 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2810 There are three article layouts available.
2811 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2812 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2813 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2814 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2819 sequential numbering
2820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2823 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2824 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2825 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2826 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Beamer Layout for presentations
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2835 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2836 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2837 with \SpecialChar LyX
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2845 \begin_layout Description
2847 \begin_inset space ~
2850 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2853 \begin_layout Description
2854 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2857 \begin_layout Description
2858 Foils Used to make transparencies
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2863 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2864 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2865 with \SpecialChar LyX
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2871 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2874 \begin_layout Description
2875 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2878 \begin_layout Description
2879 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2884 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2885 (Is used by this document.)
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2892 \begin_layout Description
2893 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2896 \begin_layout Description
2901 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2902 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2904 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2908 \begin_layout Description
2909 Slides Used to make transparencies
2912 \begin_layout Description
2914 \begin_inset space ~
2917 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2918 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2925 \begin_layout Standard
2926 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2928 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2934 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2935 of the document classes.
2938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2942 \begin_layout Standard
2943 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2946 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2968 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2969 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2971 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2974 \begin_layout Standard
2977 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2982 , are highly specialized.
2984 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2985 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2986 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2987 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2988 by some document class.
2989 There are just too many of them.
2990 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3003 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3004 document class for a new file.
3006 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3011 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3020 manual for information on how to install them.
3021 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3027 \begin_layout Standard
3028 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3029 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3030 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3031 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3032 class files to be used for dissertation
3033 s submitted to those universities.
3034 The \SpecialChar LyX
3035 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3037 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3041 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3047 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3054 name "subsec:Modules"
3059 \begin_inset Index idx
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3071 \begin_layout Standard
3072 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3073 chosen document class.
3074 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3075 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3086 \begin_inset Index idx
3089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3096 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3100 \begin_layout Standard
3101 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3102 packages or file format converters that are not always
3103 installed by default.
3105 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3106 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3107 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3108 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3110 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3111 file without the missing prerequisites.
3112 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3113 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3120 \begin_inset Index idx
3123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3124 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3134 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3143 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3155 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3157 will advise you about these things.
3165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3169 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3174 \begin_inset Index idx
3177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3178 Document ! Local Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3187 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3188 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3189 : They are intended to be used in
3190 a variety of different documents.
3191 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3192 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3193 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3194 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3195 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3215 manual for information on how to use it.
3218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3222 \begin_layout Standard
3223 Each class has a default set of options.
3224 Here's a quick table describing them:
3227 \begin_layout Standard
3228 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3234 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset Tabular
3237 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3238 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3239 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 \begin_layout Standard
3698 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3704 \begin_layout Standard
3705 You're probably also wondering what
3706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3718 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3719 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3724 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3729 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3739 headings, there are also
3747 headings, and so on.
3748 We will describe these headings fully in section
3749 \begin_inset space ~
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3755 reference "subsec:Headings"
3762 \begin_layout Subsection
3764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3766 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3771 \begin_inset Index idx
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 \begin_inset Index idx
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3793 \begin_layout Standard
3794 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3803 \begin_inset space ~
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3816 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3818 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3819 doesn't support special options you want to
3820 use for your document.
3821 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3822 -class and its options, you have to read
3826 \begin_layout Standard
3830 \begin_inset space ~
3837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3843 \begin_inset space ~
3848 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3849 You can choose between the following five options:
3852 \begin_layout Labeling
3853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3858 Use default page style of current class.
3861 \begin_layout Labeling
3862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3867 No page numbers or headings.
3870 \begin_layout Labeling
3871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3879 \begin_layout Labeling
3880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3885 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3886 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3887 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3888 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3891 \begin_layout Labeling
3892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3897 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3898 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3904 \begin_inset Index idx
3907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3909 -packages ! fancyhdr
3915 How they are defined is explained in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3929 \begin_layout Standard
3930 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3931 \begin_inset space ~
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3937 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3944 \begin_layout Subsection
3945 Paper Size and Orientation
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 Document ! Paper size
3956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3958 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3965 \begin_layout Standard
3966 You can find the following options in the menu
3969 \begin_inset space ~
3976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3980 \begin_inset Index idx
3983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3992 \begin_layout Labeling
3993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 What size paper to print on.
4007 \begin_layout Itemize
4013 \begin_layout Itemize
4019 \begin_layout Itemize
4025 \begin_layout Itemize
4031 \begin_layout Itemize
4034 US letter, US legal, US executive
4037 \begin_layout Itemize
4043 \begin_layout Itemize
4050 \begin_layout Labeling
4051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4056 To choose whether to output as
4067 \begin_layout Labeling
4068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4072 \begin_inset space ~
4077 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4078 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4081 \begin_layout Subsection
4083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4085 name "subsec:Margins"
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 \begin_layout Standard
4113 Paper margins are set in the menu
4115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4119 \begin_inset Index idx
4122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4131 \begin_layout Standard
4132 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4133 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4134 the paper format and the font size into account.
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4148 That includes the paragraph environments.
4149 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4150 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4151 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4153 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4162 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4164 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4165 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4166 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4169 \begin_layout Section
4170 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4171 \begin_inset Index idx
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4175 Paragraph ! Indentation
4183 \begin_layout Subsection
4185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4187 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4194 \begin_layout Standard
4195 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4196 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4199 \begin_layout Standard
4200 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4201 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4202 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4203 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4207 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4213 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4214 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4215 language than English.
4217 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4220 \begin_layout Standard
4221 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4222 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4223 into \SpecialChar LyX
4225 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4228 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4230 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4231 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4232 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4239 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4240 goes to produce a printable file.
4245 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4247 gives you the ability globally to change
4251 these pre-coded spacings.
4252 We will explain more later.
4255 \begin_layout Subsection
4256 Paragraph Separation
4257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4259 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 Paragraph ! Separation
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4284 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4303 \begin_inset Index idx
4306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4312 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4315 \begin_layout Subsection
4319 \begin_layout Standard
4320 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4325 \begin_inset space ~
4330 dialog and toggle the
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4341 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4345 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4346 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4350 \begin_layout Standard
4351 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4352 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4355 \begin_layout Subsection
4357 \begin_inset Index idx
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4376 \begin_inset Index idx
4379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4388 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4392 \begin_inset space ~
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4402 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 -packages ! setspace
4418 installed to use this feature.
4423 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4433 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4436 \begin_layout Section
4437 Paragraph Environments
4438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4440 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4445 \begin_inset Index idx
4448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4449 Paragraph ! Environments
4455 \begin_inset Index idx
4458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4459 Paragraph environments|(
4467 \begin_layout Subsection
4471 \begin_layout Standard
4472 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4475 \begin_layout Standard
4494 \begin_inset Newline newline
4497 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4499 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4501 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4510 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 A paragraph environment is simply a
4515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4522 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4523 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4524 scheme, labels, and so on.
4525 Additionally, you can
4526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4533 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4534 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4535 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4536 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4538 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4540 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4543 \begin_layout Standard
4544 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4545 \begin_inset Graphics
4546 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4552 at the left end of the toolbar.
4554 will change the environment of the
4558 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4559 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4560 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4564 \begin_layout Standard
4573 create a new paragraph using the
4577 paragraph environment.
4579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4586 because if you are in one of these environments:
4589 \begin_layout Itemize
4595 \begin_layout Itemize
4601 \begin_layout Itemize
4607 \begin_layout Itemize
4613 \begin_layout Itemize
4619 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Itemize
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4633 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4637 , rather than resetting it to
4642 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4643 \begin_inset space ~
4647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4649 reference "sec:Nesting"
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4660 \begin_layout Standard
4661 The default paragraph environment is
4666 It creates a plain paragraph.
4668 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4669 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4670 this manual) are in the
4677 \begin_layout Standard
4678 You can nest a paragraph using the
4682 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4690 \begin_layout Subsection
4692 \begin_inset Index idx
4695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4704 \begin_layout Standard
4705 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4706 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4715 for thanks or contact information.
4716 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4717 places all of this on a separate page
4718 along with today's date.
4719 For other types of documents, the title
4720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4727 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4733 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4747 Here's how you use them:
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 Put the title of your document in the
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the author name in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4768 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4774 Note that using this environment is optional.
4775 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4776 will automatically insert today's date.
4777 If you don't want a date, use the option
4779 Suppress default date on front page
4783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4786 \begin_inset space ~
4794 \begin_layout Standard
4795 You can use footnotes to insert
4796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4803 or contact information.
4806 \begin_layout Subsection
4808 \begin_inset Index idx
4811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4820 name "subsec:Headings"
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4830 takes care of the numbering for you.
4833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4835 \begin_inset Index idx
4838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4839 Section headings ! Numbered
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4852 \begin_layout Enumerate
4858 \begin_layout Enumerate
4864 \begin_layout Enumerate
4870 \begin_layout Enumerate
4876 \begin_layout Enumerate
4882 \begin_layout Enumerate
4888 \begin_layout Enumerate
4894 \begin_layout Standard
4896 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4897 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4898 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4902 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4903 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4904 You group the book into chapters.
4906 does a similar grouping:
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 is divided into either
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4949 \begin_layout Itemize
4961 \begin_layout Itemize
4973 \begin_layout Itemize
4985 \begin_layout Standard
4986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4994 Not all document types use the
4998 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5003 is the top-level heading.
5011 \begin_layout Standard
5016 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5017 labels it with its number,
5018 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5020 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5034 \begin_inset Index idx
5037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5038 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5047 The unnumbered section headings have a
5048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5055 at the end of their name.
5056 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5057 the table of contents, see section
5058 \begin_inset space ~
5062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5072 Changing the Numbering
5073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5075 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5082 \begin_layout Standard
5083 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5084 in the Table of Contents.
5085 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5087 Just as certain classes start with
5101 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5111 This is something you can change.
5114 \begin_layout Standard
5117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5121 \begin_inset Index idx
5124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5137 \begin_inset space ~
5142 you will see two counters.
5147 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5148 numbers a section heading.
5149 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5154 Short Titles of Headings
5155 \begin_inset Index idx
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5159 Section headings ! Short titles
5165 \begin_inset Argument 1
5168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5177 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5184 \begin_layout Standard
5185 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5186 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5187 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5188 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5191 \begin_layout Standard
5193 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5194 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5195 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5196 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5201 \begin_inset space ~
5207 This will insert a box labeled
5208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5219 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5220 This also works for captions inside floats.
5221 There can only be one short title per title.
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The following information applies to all section headings:
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5237 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5240 \begin_layout Itemize
5241 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5252 \begin_layout Subsection
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5272 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5273 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5274 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5275 the text they contain.
5276 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5284 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5287 \begin_layout Standard
5288 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5297 when you start a new paragraph.
5298 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5302 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5303 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5304 have to change back to the
5308 environment yourself.
5311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5320 \begin_inset Index idx
5323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5332 \begin_layout Standard
5333 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5334 time for the differences.
5343 are identical except for one difference:
5347 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5356 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 Here's an example of the
5373 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5375 See – no indentation!
5379 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5380 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5381 the other paragraph.
5384 \begin_layout Standard
5385 Here's another example, this time in the
5392 \begin_layout Quotation
5398 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5399 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5400 the first line, then
5404 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5408 you were quoting other text.
5411 \begin_layout Quotation
5412 Here's a new paragraph.
5413 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5414 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 As the examples show,
5422 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5423 They should put quotes in the
5428 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5432 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5437 \begin_inset Index idx
5440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset Index idx
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5466 \begin_layout Standard
5471 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5477 \begin_inset Newline newline
5480 Which I did not rehearse!
5484 It could be much worse.
5485 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5487 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5488 indented a bit more than the first.
5489 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5495 \begin_inset Newline newline
5498 And make things look fine
5499 \begin_inset Newline newline
5505 arg "newline-insert newline"
5511 \begin_layout Standard
5516 does not indent both margins.
5517 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5518 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5521 arg "newline-insert newline"
5527 \begin_layout Subsection
5529 \begin_inset Index idx
5532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5548 \begin_layout Standard
5550 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5560 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5561 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5570 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5571 lets you provide your own label.
5572 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5573 describing some general features of all four of them.
5576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5580 \begin_layout Standard
5581 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5583 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5584 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5593 reset the environment to
5597 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5598 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5599 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5607 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5614 \begin_layout Standard
5615 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5616 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5617 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5619 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5620 you read all of section
5621 \begin_inset space ~
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5627 reference "sec:Nesting"
5634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5636 \begin_inset Index idx
5639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5660 paragraph environment.
5661 It has the following properties:
5664 \begin_layout Itemize
5665 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5671 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5675 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 The items can have any length.
5682 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5683 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5695 environment inside another
5699 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5709 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5714 \begin_inset space ~
5718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5720 reference "sec:Nesting"
5724 for a full explanation of nesting.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5738 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5741 \begin_layout Standard
5742 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5743 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5746 \begin_layout Itemize
5747 The label for the first level
5751 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5755 \begin_layout Itemize
5756 The label for the second level is a dash.
5760 \begin_layout Itemize
5761 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5765 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5770 \begin_layout Itemize
5771 Back out to the third level.
5775 \begin_layout Itemize
5776 Back to the second level.
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 Back to the outermost level.
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 These are the default labels for an
5790 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5795 dialog in the submenu
5800 \begin_inset Index idx
5803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5809 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5813 \begin_layout Standard
5814 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5815 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5817 \begin_inset space ~
5821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5823 reference "sec:Nesting"
5830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5832 \begin_inset Index idx
5835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5844 name "sec:Enumerate"
5851 \begin_layout Standard
5856 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5857 It has these properties:
5860 \begin_layout Enumerate
5861 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 environment resets the counter to one.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5898 Items can have any length.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5902 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5914 \begin_layout Standard
5923 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5925 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5926 labels the four different levels in an
5933 \begin_layout Enumerate
5934 The first level of an
5938 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5947 \begin_layout Enumerate
5948 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5952 \begin_layout Enumerate
5953 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5956 \begin_layout Enumerate
5957 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5962 \begin_layout Enumerate
5963 Back to the third level
5967 \begin_layout Enumerate
5968 Back to the second level.
5972 \begin_layout Enumerate
5973 Back to the outermost level.
5976 \begin_layout Standard
5977 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5981 environment, see section
5982 \begin_inset space ~
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5988 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5993 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5997 \begin_layout Standard
5998 There is more to nesting
6002 environments than we've stated here.
6003 You should read section
6004 \begin_inset space ~
6008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6010 reference "sec:Nesting"
6014 to learn more about nesting.
6017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6019 \begin_inset Index idx
6022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6031 \begin_layout Standard
6032 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6036 list has no fixed label.
6037 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6046 of the first line as the label.
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Example: This is an example of the
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6060 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6064 \begin_layout Standard
6066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6073 it is meant that the first usage of the
6077 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6079 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6087 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6093 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6095 \begin_inset space ~
6101 \begin_inset space ~
6105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6107 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6111 for more information.) Here is an example:
6114 \begin_layout Description
6116 \begin_inset space ~
6119 Example: This one shows how to use a
6122 \begin_inset space ~
6134 \begin_layout Description
6135 Usage: You should use the
6139 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6140 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6142 It's not a good idea to use a
6146 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6147 You're better off using
6159 paragraphs into them.
6162 \begin_layout Description
6163 Nesting: You can nest
6167 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6171 \begin_layout Standard
6172 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6173 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6174 them from the first line.
6177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6179 \begin_inset Index idx
6182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6191 \begin_layout Standard
6196 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6197 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6210 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6212 Here are its properties:
6215 \begin_layout Labeling
6216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6218 \begin_inset space ~
6221 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6230 of each line as the item label.
6235 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6236 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6237 space as described above.
6240 \begin_layout Labeling
6241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6242 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6243 uses different margins for the item label and the
6244 body of the item text.
6245 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6246 label width plus a little extra space.
6250 \begin_layout Labeling
6251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6253 \begin_inset space ~
6256 width \SpecialChar LyX
6257 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6258 If the label width is larger, the label
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6266 into the first line.
6267 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6268 margin of the rest of the item text.
6271 \begin_layout Labeling
6272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6277 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6282 environment has the same left margin.
6283 \begin_inset Newline newline
6286 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6296 dialog (toolbar button
6299 arg "layout-paragraph"
6306 \begin_inset space ~
6311 determines the default label width.
6312 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 multiple times instead.
6322 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6332 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6335 \begin_inset space ~
6340 every time you alter a label in a
6345 \begin_inset Newline newline
6348 The predefined default width is the length of
6349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6357 \begin_inset space ~
6363 \begin_layout Standard
6368 list the same way as the
6372 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6378 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6382 \begin_layout Standard
6387 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6388 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6390 \begin_inset space ~
6394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6396 reference "sec:Nesting"
6400 to learn about nesting.
6403 \begin_layout Standard
6404 There is yet another feature of the
6408 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6409 left-justifies the item labels by
6411 You can use additional
6415 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6416 justifies the item label.
6421 are documented in section
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6428 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6433 Here are some examples:
6436 \begin_layout Labeling
6437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6438 Left The default for
6445 \begin_layout Labeling
6446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6454 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6457 \begin_layout Labeling
6458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6470 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6473 \begin_layout Subsection
6475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6477 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6482 \begin_inset Index idx
6485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6494 \begin_layout Standard
6495 The features described in this section require that the module
6497 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6499 is loaded in the document settings.
6500 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6506 \begin_inset Index idx
6509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6511 -packages ! enumitem
6519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6520 Custom Enumerate Lists
6521 \begin_inset Index idx
6524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6525 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6535 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6541 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6542 There you add the command
6545 \begin_layout Standard
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6566 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6567 Code, look at section
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6574 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6587 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6594 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6595 For capital Roman numerals replace
6607 in the command above.
6608 For Arabic numerals use
6616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6623 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 You can only number 26
6649 \begin_inset space ~
6652 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6660 \begin_layout Standard
6661 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6662 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6666 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6669 \begin_layout Enumerate
6670 \begin_inset Argument 1
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6699 \begin_layout Enumerate
6700 \begin_inset Argument 1
6703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 \begin_layout Enumerate
6731 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_inset Argument 1
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 \begin_layout Enumerate
6760 \begin_inset Argument 1
6763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6790 For this list these commands were used:
6793 \begin_layout Standard
6804 \begin_inset Newline newline
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6837 makes the label emphasized and
6846 \begin_layout Standard
6847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6855 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6856 lists until you change the definition.
6864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6866 \begin_inset Index idx
6869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6878 \begin_layout Standard
6879 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6882 \begin_layout Enumerate
6883 \begin_inset Argument 1
6886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6905 \begin_inset Note Note
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 goes back to default numbering
6917 \begin_layout Enumerate
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6930 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6935 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6936 to indicate that it is a resumed
6937 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6938 , but in the output.
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6942 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6950 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6962 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6963 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6964 of a normal enumeration.
6965 There, insert the command
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6979 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6983 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_layout Enumerate
6991 \begin_layout Standard
6992 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6996 \begin_inset Argument 1
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7015 This enumeration starts at 4
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7035 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7038 \begin_layout Itemize
7042 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 with standard spacing
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7049 Add there the command
7053 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7056 \begin_layout Itemize
7057 \begin_inset Argument 1
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Itemize
7083 \begin_layout Itemize
7087 \begin_layout Standard
7088 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7095 \begin_inset Index idx
7098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7100 -packages ! enumitem
7106 For more information see its documentation,
7107 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7119 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7120 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7124 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7128 \begin_inset Argument 1
7131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7139 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7153 with negative indentation
7156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7157 Further Customization
7158 \begin_inset Index idx
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7162 Lists ! Customization
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7171 You can also change the style of description lists.
7175 \begin_layout Standard
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 changes the description label font, the command
7185 \begin_layout Standard
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 sets the list style.
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 An example where the command
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7204 itshape, style=nextline
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7211 \begin_layout Description
7213 \begin_inset space ~
7217 \begin_inset Argument 1
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7228 itshape, style=nextline
7238 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7239 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7243 \begin_layout Description
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7248 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7249 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7250 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7253 \begin_layout Standard
7254 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 -packages ! enumitem
7271 For more information see its documentation
7272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7281 \begin_layout Subsection
7283 \begin_inset Index idx
7286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7297 \begin_inset space ~
7300 Address: An Overview
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7304 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7305 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7313 \begin_inset space ~
7319 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7320 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7321 gags on the document.
7322 In contrast, you can use the
7329 \begin_inset space ~
7334 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7335 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 Of course, you're not limited to using
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7356 \begin_inset space ~
7361 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7362 some European academic papers.
7365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7369 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7382 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7386 \begin_inset space ~
7391 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7392 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7393 Here's an example of each:
7396 \begin_layout Right Address
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7402 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7409 When is it? What is today?
7412 \begin_layout Standard
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7424 the largest block of text on a single line.
7425 Here's an example of the
7432 \begin_layout Address
7434 \begin_inset Newline newline
7437 Where do I send this
7438 \begin_inset Newline newline
7441 Your post office and country
7444 \begin_layout Standard
7445 As you can see, both
7452 \begin_inset space ~
7457 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7462 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7463 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7469 This makes sense, since
7477 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7478 Thus, you have to use
7485 arg "newline-insert newline"
7490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7493 \begin_inset space ~
7497 \begin_inset space ~
7502 ) to start a new line in an
7509 \begin_inset space ~
7517 \begin_layout Subsection
7521 \begin_layout Standard
7522 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7523 or list of references.
7525 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7530 \begin_inset Index idx
7533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 \begin_layout Standard
7547 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7548 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7549 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7550 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7564 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7565 The book document classes ignores the
7569 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7573 in a letter document class.
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7581 environment does several things for you.
7582 First, it puts the centered label
7583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7591 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7593 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7594 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7595 the subsequent text.
7596 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7598 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7602 \begin_layout Standard
7603 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7607 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7608 The new paragraph will still be in the
7613 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7614 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 \begin_inset Float figure
7623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7625 \begin_inset Graphics
7626 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7634 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7639 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7660 \begin_layout Standard
7661 We would love to demonstrate the
7665 environment, but since this document is in the
7666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7673 class, we can't do this.
7674 We inserted it therefore as figure
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7681 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7686 If you have never heard of an
7687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7694 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7711 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7718 \begin_layout Standard
7723 environment is used to list references.
7724 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7725 only use it at the end of the document.
7737 \begin_layout Standard
7738 When you first open a
7742 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7743 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7759 depending on the document class.
7760 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7761 Each paragraph of the
7765 environment is a bibliography entry.
7770 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7771 Each new paragraph is still in the
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7780 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7782 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7784 handling, have a look at section
7785 \begin_inset space ~
7789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7791 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7798 \begin_layout Subsection
7799 Special Environments
7802 \begin_layout Standard
7804 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7805 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7813 \begin_inset Index idx
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7826 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7839 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7841 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7846 key as a fixed whitespace.
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset space ~
7868 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7886 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7889 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7892 arg "newline-insert newline"
7909 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7910 So, when you finish using the
7915 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7916 Also, you can nest the
7921 environment inside of others.
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7928 \begin_layout Itemize
7932 arg "newline-insert newline"
7935 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7940 \begin_inset space \space{}
7950 arg "newline-insert newline"
7956 \begin_layout Itemize
7960 arg "newline-insert newline"
7970 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7976 \begin_layout Itemize
7977 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7978 You must put at least one
7982 in any line you want blank.
7983 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7987 \begin_layout Itemize
7988 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7992 since that will insert
7997 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8000 arg "self-insert \""
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8010 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8014 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 printf("Hello World!
8032 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout Standard
8041 This is just the standard
8042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8053 \begin_layout Standard
8059 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8061 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8062 as if you used a typewriter.
8063 \begin_inset Index idx
8066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8067 Paragraph environments|)
8072 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8075 Program Code Listings
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8092 \begin_inset Index idx
8095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8109 environment is similar to the
8114 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8115 computer console text.
8120 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8134 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8135 you can have empty lines.
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 have a certain language and a text style
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8153 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8154 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8155 and \SpecialChar TeX
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8160 Because of these properties
8164 works like a typewriter.
8168 \begin_layout Verbatim
8173 \begin_layout Verbatim
8177 The following 2 lines are empty:
8180 \begin_layout Verbatim
8184 \begin_layout Verbatim
8188 \begin_layout Verbatim
8190 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8195 \begin_layout Standard
8200 environment is identical to
8204 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8205 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8212 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8217 \begin_layout Section
8218 Nesting Environments
8219 \begin_inset Index idx
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 Nesting ! Environments
8229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8238 \begin_layout Subsection
8242 \begin_layout Standard
8244 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8246 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8248 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8250 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8262 \begin_layout Enumerate
8266 \begin_layout Enumerate
8271 \begin_layout Enumerate
8275 \begin_layout Enumerate
8280 \begin_layout Enumerate
8284 \begin_layout Standard
8285 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8286 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8288 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8290 \begin_inset space ~
8294 \begin_inset space ~
8302 \begin_inset space ~
8306 \begin_inset space ~
8311 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8313 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8316 arg "depth-increment"
8322 arg "depth-decrement"
8336 arg "depth-increment"
8342 arg "depth-decrement"
8346 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8347 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8351 \begin_layout Standard
8352 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8353 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8354 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8355 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8356 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8362 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8364 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8367 \begin_layout Subsection
8368 What You Can and Can't Nest
8371 \begin_layout Standard
8372 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8373 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8376 \begin_layout Standard
8377 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8378 than a simple yes or no.
8379 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 Completely unnestable
8386 \begin_layout Itemize
8387 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8391 \begin_layout Itemize
8392 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8396 \begin_layout Standard
8397 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8398 environments have them:
8401 \begin_layout Description
8402 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8403 Can't nest into them.
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Itemize
8431 \begin_layout Itemize
8438 \begin_layout Description
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8443 Nestable You can nest them.
8444 You can nest other things into them.
8448 \begin_layout Itemize
8454 \begin_layout Itemize
8460 \begin_layout Itemize
8466 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 \begin_layout Itemize
8478 \begin_layout Itemize
8484 \begin_layout Itemize
8490 \begin_layout Itemize
8497 \begin_layout Itemize
8503 \begin_layout Itemize
8510 \begin_layout Description
8511 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8512 You can't nest anything into them.
8516 \begin_layout Itemize
8522 \begin_layout Itemize
8528 \begin_layout Itemize
8534 \begin_layout Itemize
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8570 \begin_layout Itemize
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_inset space ~
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Standard
8612 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8620 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8630 \begin_inset space ~
8633 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8634 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8635 nested section headings violate this.
8643 \begin_layout Subsection
8644 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8645 \begin_inset Index idx
8648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8649 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8657 \begin_layout Standard
8658 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8659 affected by nesting anyhow.
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Standard
8677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8685 Figures and tables in
8689 are not affected by this.
8694 Have a look at section
8695 \begin_inset space ~
8699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8701 reference "sec:Floats"
8705 for more information about
8712 \begin_layout Standard
8714 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8715 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8719 \begin_layout Standard
8720 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8728 of its own, it behaves just like a
8729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8736 paragraph environment.
8737 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8741 \begin_layout Standard
8742 Here's an example with a table:
8745 \begin_layout Enumerate
8750 \begin_layout Enumerate
8751 This is (a) and it's nested.
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8762 \begin_layout Standard
8764 \begin_inset Tabular
8765 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8766 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8853 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8860 \begin_layout Enumerate
8862 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8866 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8871 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8874 \begin_layout Enumerate
8879 \begin_layout Enumerate
8880 This is (a) and it's nested.
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8885 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8891 \begin_layout Standard
8893 \begin_inset Tabular
8894 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8895 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8896 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8897 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8988 \begin_layout Enumerate
8995 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8998 \begin_layout Enumerate
9002 \begin_layout Standard
9003 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9007 \begin_layout Standard
9008 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9011 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9019 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 This is (a) and it's nested.
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Standard
9032 \begin_inset Tabular
9033 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9034 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 \begin_layout Standard
9122 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9128 \begin_layout Enumerate
9130 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9137 \begin_layout Enumerate
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9142 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9148 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9149 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9153 \begin_layout Subsection
9154 Usage and General Features
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9159 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9168 is the innermost possible depth.
9169 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9172 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 level #1 – outermost
9177 \begin_layout Enumerate
9182 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9192 \begin_layout Itemize
9197 \begin_layout Itemize
9206 \begin_layout Standard
9207 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9208 both of them in the example.
9209 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9219 For example, if we tried to nest another
9224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9231 , we would get errors.
9234 \begin_layout Subsection
9236 \begin_inset Index idx
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 \begin_layout Standard
9249 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9250 We have several examples of nested environments.
9251 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9255 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9256 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9259 \begin_layout Labeling
9260 \labelwidthstring MMM
9261 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9270 \begin_layout Labeling
9271 \labelwidthstring MMM
9272 #2-a This is level #2.
9273 We created it by using
9276 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9282 arg "depth-increment"
9289 \begin_layout Labeling
9290 \labelwidthstring MMM
9291 #3-a This is level #3.
9292 This time, we just enter
9299 arg "depth-increment"
9303 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9307 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9313 arg "depth-increment"
9320 \begin_layout Standard
9325 environment, nested inside of
9326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 So, it's at level #4.
9335 We did this by entering
9338 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9344 arg "depth-increment"
9347 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9352 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9368 \begin_layout Standard
9373 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9376 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9382 \begin_layout Labeling
9383 \labelwidthstring MMM
9384 #4-a This is level #4.
9388 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9391 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9396 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9400 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9405 keep nesting things inside
9406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9417 \begin_layout Labeling
9418 \labelwidthstring MMM
9419 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9427 and this is level #6.
9428 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #5-b Back to level #5.
9438 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9444 arg "depth-decrement"
9451 \begin_layout Labeling
9452 \labelwidthstring MMM
9456 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9462 arg "depth-decrement"
9465 , we're back at level #4.
9469 \begin_layout Labeling
9470 \labelwidthstring MMM
9471 #3-b Back to level #3.
9472 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9476 \begin_layout Labeling
9477 \labelwidthstring MMM
9478 #2-b Back to level #2.
9483 \begin_layout Labeling
9484 \labelwidthstring MMM
9485 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9486 After this sentence, we will enter
9490 and change the paragraph environment back to
9497 \begin_layout Standard
9498 We could have also used the
9514 environment in place of the
9519 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9523 Example 2: Inheritance
9526 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9527 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9530 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9539 arg "depth-increment"
9543 \begin_inset Newline newline
9546 which, we will change to the
9554 \begin_layout Enumerate
9559 environment, at level #2.
9562 \begin_layout Enumerate
9563 Notice how the nested
9567 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9571 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9575 \begin_layout Standard
9576 We ended this example by entering
9581 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9585 and reset the nesting depth by using
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9594 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9595 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9604 \begin_inset Argument 1
9607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9608 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9616 \begin_layout Enumerate
9617 This is level #1, in an
9621 paragraph environment.
9622 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9626 \begin_layout Enumerate
9631 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9637 arg "depth-increment"
9641 Now, what happens if we nest an
9645 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9646 label be? An asterisk?
9650 \begin_layout Itemize
9660 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9661 So, its label is a bullet.
9662 (We got here by using
9665 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9671 arg "depth-increment"
9674 , then changing the environment to
9682 \begin_layout Itemize
9683 Here's level #4, produced using
9686 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9692 arg "depth-increment"
9696 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9701 \begin_layout Enumerate
9704 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9709 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9713 , because we are in the
9721 environment (that is, it is an
9736 \begin_layout Enumerate
9741 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9742 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9746 \begin_layout Enumerate
9747 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9750 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9753 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9756 \begin_layout Enumerate
9760 arg "depth-decrement"
9763 to decrease the depth after the next
9766 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9773 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9783 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9797 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9802 reset the counter for the label.
9806 \begin_layout Enumerate
9810 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9816 arg "depth-decrement"
9819 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9820 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9821 into the twofold-nested
9829 \begin_layout Enumerate
9830 The same thing happens if we do another
9833 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9839 arg "depth-decrement"
9842 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9845 \begin_layout Standard
9846 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9851 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9866 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9873 The same rule applies for the
9877 environment, as well.
9880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9881 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9884 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9886 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9887 the same detail with how we did it.
9896 \begin_layout Standard
9904 arg "depth-increment"
9911 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9912 the example in parentheses someplace.
9913 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9914 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9915 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9919 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9929 Now we will add verse.
9930 \begin_inset Newline newline
9933 It will get much worse.
9934 \begin_inset Newline newline
9944 arg "depth-increment"
9955 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9956 \begin_inset Newline newline
9959 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9960 \begin_inset Newline newline
9966 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9979 \begin_layout Standard
9980 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9986 \begin_layout Standard
9988 \begin_inset Tabular
9989 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9990 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9991 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9992 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10077 \begin_layout Verse
10081 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10091 arg "depth-increment"
10097 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 arg "depth-decrement"
10118 \begin_layout Enumerate
10123 : level #1) This is another item.
10124 Note that selecting a
10128 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10129 3 times to put the table inside the
10137 \begin_layout Quotation
10138 We're now ending the
10142 list and changing to
10147 We're still at level #1.
10148 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10149 The next set of paragraphs is a
10150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10157 We will nest both the
10164 \begin_inset space ~
10169 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10173 for the letter body.
10177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10180 to preserve the depth.
10181 Remember that you need to use
10184 arg "newline-insert newline"
10187 to create multiple lines inside the
10194 \begin_inset space ~
10204 \begin_layout Right Address
10206 \begin_inset Newline newline
10209 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10210 \begin_inset Newline newline
10216 \begin_layout Address
10218 \begin_inset space ~
10224 \begin_layout Quotation
10225 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10229 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10230 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10231 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10232 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10233 as soon as possible.
10234 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10237 \begin_layout Quotation
10238 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10239 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10240 with your order, along with payment.
10243 \begin_layout Quotation
10244 We thank you again for your patience.
10247 \begin_layout Address
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10256 \begin_layout Quotation
10257 That ends that example!
10260 \begin_layout Standard
10261 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10262 gives you a lot of power with just
10264 We could have easily nested an
10285 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10288 \begin_layout Subsection
10290 \begin_inset Index idx
10293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10294 Nesting ! Separation
10300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10302 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10309 \begin_layout Standard
10310 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10312 For example you need two different enumerations:
10315 \begin_layout Enumerate
10320 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 \begin_layout Enumerate
10329 \begin_layout Standard
10330 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10336 \begin_layout Itemize
10342 \begin_layout Standard
10343 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10349 \begin_layout Enumerate
10353 \begin_layout Enumerate
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10361 \begin_layout Standard
10362 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10363 list item and use the menu
10365 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10366 Start New Environment
10369 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10371 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10374 arg "paragraph-break"
10378 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10379 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10380 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10381 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10384 \begin_layout Standard
10385 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10388 arg "paragraph-break"
10391 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10394 \begin_layout Section
10395 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10396 \begin_inset Index idx
10399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10408 \begin_layout Standard
10409 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10410 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10412 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10413 be broken at the end of a line.
10414 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10418 \begin_layout Subsection
10420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10422 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10427 \begin_inset Index idx
10430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10439 \begin_layout Standard
10440 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10441 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10442 ) not to break the line at
10444 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10447 \begin_layout Quote
10448 Further documentation is given in section
10449 \begin_inset Newline newline
10453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10455 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10479 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10488 A protected space is set with
10490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10493 \begin_inset space ~
10501 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10507 \begin_layout Subsection
10509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10511 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10516 \begin_inset Index idx
10519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10520 Spacing ! Horizontal
10528 \begin_layout Standard
10529 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 The length units are listed in Appendix
10537 \begin_inset space ~
10541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10543 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10554 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10559 \begin_inset Index idx
10562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10563 Spaces ! Inter-word
10571 \begin_layout Standard
10572 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10573 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10574 at the ends of sentences.
10575 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10576 automatically takes care about this.
10577 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10578 followed by a period; see section
10579 \begin_inset space ~
10583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10585 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10590 To insert a normal space, select
10592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10593 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10595 \begin_inset space ~
10603 arg "space-insert normal"
10609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10613 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10618 \begin_inset Index idx
10621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10630 \begin_layout Standard
10632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10639 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10649 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10650 inside abbreviations:
10653 \begin_layout Quote
10655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10659 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10662 \begin_layout Standard
10663 or between values and units.
10664 Compare for example this:
10665 \begin_inset Newline newline
10669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10673 \begin_inset Newline newline
10676 10 kg (normal space
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10680 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10683 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10685 \begin_inset space ~
10693 arg "space-insert thin"
10699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 You can also insert the following space types:
10707 \begin_layout Description
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10716 space A line with a
10717 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10721 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10725 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10728 negative thin space between the arrows.
10731 \begin_layout Description
10733 \begin_inset space ~
10737 \begin_inset space ~
10740 space A line with a
10741 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10745 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10749 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10752 negative medium space between the arrows.
10755 \begin_layout Description
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset space ~
10764 space A line with a
10765 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10769 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10773 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10776 negative thick space between the arrows.
10779 \begin_layout Description
10781 \begin_inset space ~
10785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10789 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10793 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10797 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10801 \begin_inset space ~
10805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10808 em) space between the arrows.
10811 \begin_layout Description
10813 \begin_inset space ~
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10821 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10825 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10829 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10833 \begin_inset space ~
10837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10840 em) space between the arrows.
10843 \begin_layout Description
10845 \begin_inset space ~
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10853 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10857 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10861 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10872 em) space between the arrows.
10875 \begin_layout Description
10877 \begin_inset space ~
10881 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10885 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10890 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10897 cm space between the arrows.
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10902 \begin_inset space ~
10906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10908 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10912 lists the different space sizes.
10915 \begin_layout Standard
10916 \begin_inset Float table
10921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10922 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10927 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10931 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10941 \begin_inset Tabular
10942 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10943 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11061 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11220 \begin_inset Index idx
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_layout Standard
11233 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11234 feature for adding extra space
11235 in a uniform fashion.
11236 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11237 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11238 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11239 equally between themselves.
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11243 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11246 \begin_layout Quote
11248 This is on the left side
11249 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11252 This is on the right
11255 \begin_layout Quote
11258 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11262 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11268 \begin_layout Quote
11271 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11275 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11279 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11285 \begin_layout Standard
11286 That was an example in the
11292 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11300 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11303 is one in a standard paragraph.
11304 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11308 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11312 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11315 \begin_inset space ~
11320 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11323 \begin_layout Standard
11325 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11329 \begin_inset space ~
11335 \begin_layout Standard
11337 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11341 \begin_inset space ~
11347 \begin_layout Standard
11349 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11359 \begin_layout Standard
11361 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11365 \begin_inset space ~
11371 \begin_layout Standard
11373 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11383 \begin_layout Standard
11385 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11389 \begin_inset space ~
11395 \begin_layout Standard
11396 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11404 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11408 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11410 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11411 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11415 option in the space dialog.
11423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11427 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11432 \begin_inset Index idx
11435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11444 \begin_layout Standard
11445 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11446 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11449 \begin_layout Standard
11450 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11453 What is correct English?:
11454 \begin_inset Newline newline
11458 \begin_inset Newline newline
11462 \begin_inset space ~
11465 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11466 \begin_inset Newline newline
11470 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11481 \begin_inset Newline newline
11485 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11496 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11504 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11521 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11524 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11528 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_inset space ~
11542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11545 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11554 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11555 That is why it is named
11556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11564 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11565 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11569 \begin_layout Subsection
11571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11573 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11578 \begin_inset Index idx
11581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11590 \begin_layout Standard
11591 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11596 \begin_inset space ~
11602 There you find the following sizes:
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11618 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11619 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11624 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11627 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11629 \begin_inset space ~
11635 \begin_inset Index idx
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 Document ! Settings
11644 for the paragraph separation.
11645 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11656 \begin_layout Standard
11662 \begin_inset Index idx
11665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11672 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11677 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11678 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11687 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11696 s are described in section
11697 \begin_inset space ~
11701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11703 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11712 If there are several
11716 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11717 You can therefore use
11721 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11729 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11730 \begin_inset space ~
11734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11736 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11743 \begin_layout Standard
11744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11754 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11755 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11767 \begin_layout Subsection
11768 Paragraph Alignment
11769 \begin_inset Index idx
11772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11773 Paragraph ! Alignment
11781 \begin_layout Standard
11782 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11784 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11787 dialog (toolbar button
11790 arg "layout-paragraph"
11794 There are five possibilities:
11797 \begin_layout Itemize
11805 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11811 \begin_layout Itemize
11819 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11825 \begin_layout Itemize
11833 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11839 \begin_layout Itemize
11847 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11853 \begin_layout Itemize
11861 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11867 \begin_layout Standard
11868 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11869 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11870 the left and right margins.
11871 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11874 \begin_layout Standard
11876 This paragraph is right aligned,
11879 \begin_layout Standard
11881 this one is centered,
11884 \begin_layout Standard
11886 this one is left aligned.
11889 \begin_layout Subsection
11891 \begin_inset Index idx
11894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11895 Page breaks ! Forced
11901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11903 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11910 \begin_layout Standard
11911 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11912 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11913 force a page break where you want one.
11914 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11915 is good at page breaking.
11916 Only if you use a lot of
11920 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11921 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11924 \begin_layout Standard
11925 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11926 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11930 have to change the page breaking.
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11936 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11941 \begin_inset space ~
11947 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11950 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11952 \begin_inset space ~
11957 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11959 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11960 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11963 \begin_layout Standard
11964 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11965 at the top of a page.
11966 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11968 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11969 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11970 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11974 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11978 to learn more about
11985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11989 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11994 \begin_inset Index idx
11997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11998 Page breaks ! Clear
12006 \begin_layout Standard
12007 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12008 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12009 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12010 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12011 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12015 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12018 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12020 \begin_inset space ~
12026 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12029 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12031 \begin_inset space ~
12035 \begin_inset space ~
12040 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12041 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12044 \begin_layout Subsection
12046 \begin_inset Index idx
12049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12058 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12065 \begin_layout Standard
12066 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12068 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12071 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12073 \begin_inset space ~
12077 \begin_inset space ~
12085 arg "newline-insert newline"
12089 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12092 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12094 \begin_inset space ~
12098 \begin_inset space ~
12106 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12109 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12111 This is useful to avoid
12112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12119 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12122 \begin_layout Standard
12123 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12124 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12126 very good at line breaking.
12127 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12128 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12129 \begin_inset space ~
12133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12135 reference "sec:Quote"
12140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12142 reference "sec:Verse"
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12149 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12156 \begin_layout Subsection
12158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12160 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12165 \begin_inset Index idx
12168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12177 \begin_layout Standard
12179 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12202 you can insert horizontal lines.
12203 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12204 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12205 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12208 \begin_layout Standard
12210 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12221 \begin_layout Section
12222 Characters and Symbols
12225 \begin_layout Standard
12226 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12227 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12228 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12236 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12240 for information on how this is done.
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12249 dialog via the menu
12251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12258 \begin_layout Standard
12259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12267 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12268 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12270 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12278 \begin_layout Section
12279 Fonts and Text Styles
12280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12282 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12289 \begin_layout Subsection
12291 \begin_inset Index idx
12294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12303 \begin_layout Standard
12304 There are two types of fonts:
12307 \begin_layout Description
12309 \begin_inset space ~
12313 \begin_inset Index idx
12316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12322 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12327 characters) in the font.
12328 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12329 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12330 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12331 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12332 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12333 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12334 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12335 \begin_inset Newline newline
12338 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12339 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12340 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12341 sizes than at small ones.
12342 \begin_inset Newline newline
12356 \begin_inset space ~
12364 \begin_layout Description
12366 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_inset Index idx
12373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12379 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12380 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12381 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12382 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12383 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12384 image manipulation program.
12385 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12386 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12390 pixels high up to 34
12391 \begin_inset space ~
12394 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12395 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12396 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12398 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12399 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12400 \begin_inset Newline newline
12403 Bitmap fonts are named
12406 \begin_inset space ~
12411 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12414 \begin_layout Standard
12415 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12416 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12417 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12418 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12419 use scalable fonts.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12426 \begin_layout Standard
12427 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12428 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12429 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12430 font to emphasize text, you use an
12431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12439 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12441 In \SpecialChar LyX
12442 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12446 \begin_layout Subsection
12449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12451 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12458 \begin_layout Standard
12459 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12460 used its own fonts.
12461 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12462 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12465 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12466 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12467 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12468 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12469 to a word processor.
12470 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12471 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12472 files are very portable across
12473 different machines.
12474 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12475 has increased a lot
12476 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12479 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12481 \begin_inset space ~
12485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12487 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12492 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12493 code in the document
12494 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12498 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12499 engines that are also able directly
12500 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12502 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12504 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12506 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12507 that is installed on your system.
12508 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12511 \begin_layout Standard
12512 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12520 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12521 es; so you might have to experiment.
12529 \begin_layout Standard
12530 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12539 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12540 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12541 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12542 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12551 \begin_layout Subsection
12552 Document Font and Font size
12553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12555 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12560 \begin_inset Index idx
12563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12570 \begin_inset Index idx
12573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 You can set the document fonts in the
12585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12589 \begin_inset Index idx
12592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12593 Document ! Settings
12603 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12604 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12607 \begin_inset space ~
12616 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12618 \begin_inset space ~
12621 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12624 \begin_layout Standard
12629 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12630 This requires that you use
12642 as the output format, i.
12643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12647 \begin_inset space \space{}
12650 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12651 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12652 installed (see section
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12659 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12664 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12666 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12667 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12669 \begin_inset space ~
12672 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12673 cannot determine the family.
12674 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12675 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12678 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12681 \begin_layout Standard
12682 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12683 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12688 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12694 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12695 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12703 \begin_inset space ~
12709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12722 European Computer Modern
12725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12732 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12735 \begin_layout Standard
12744 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12745 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12753 \begin_inset space ~
12758 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12764 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12765 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12768 \begin_layout Itemize
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12777 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12795 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12796 community in order to replace
12800 as the default font.
12801 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12802 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12819 One difference is improved kerning.
12827 \begin_layout Itemize
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12835 \begin_inset space ~
12840 fonts in (the rare) case that
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12848 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12863 Virtual means that it
12864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12875 -glyphs from other fonts.
12876 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12898 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12904 \begin_inset Index idx
12907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12909 -packages ! aeguill
12914 with the document preamble line
12915 \begin_inset Newline newline
12922 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12923 \begin_inset Newline newline
12928 will fix the guillemet problem.
12933 and that accented characters are not
12937 glyph, but built of
12941 characters, the accent and the letter.
12942 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12948 If you search for example for the French word
12949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12956 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12965 and not for the glyph
12966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12980 \begin_layout Itemize
12981 If you do not like the look of
12989 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12994 \begin_inset space ~
13000 \begin_inset space ~
13010 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13011 \begin_inset space ~
13014 serif and typewriter fonts,
13018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13019 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13026 \begin_inset space ~
13035 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13040 \begin_inset space \space{}
13048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13052 \begin_inset space \space{}
13058 \begin_inset space ~
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13076 but you can also select your own.
13077 \begin_inset Newline newline
13080 The differences between roman,
13083 \begin_inset space ~
13092 fonts are explained in section
13093 \begin_inset space ~
13097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13099 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13104 \begin_inset Newline newline
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13115 was originally designed for newspapers.
13116 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13117 into the small newspaper columns.
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13126 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13129 \begin_layout Standard
13130 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13143 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13148 depends on the class you are using.
13149 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13152 \begin_layout Standard
13153 Note that the font size is the
13158 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13159 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13160 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13161 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13170 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13177 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13184 \begin_layout Standard
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13193 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13195 \begin_inset space ~
13198 serif or typewriter.
13203 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13213 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13216 \begin_layout Standard
13221 LaTeX font encoding
13223 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13224 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13230 \begin_inset Index idx
13233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13235 -packages ! fontenc
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13247 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13252 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13253 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13260 \begin_layout Standard
13261 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13263 Use Old Style Figures
13267 Use True Small Caps
13270 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13273 Use Old Style Figures
13275 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13277 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13285 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13289 Use True Small Caps
13291 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13292 of scaled capitals.
13293 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13294 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13297 \begin_layout Standard
13302 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13303 a font to display the script characters.
13307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13308 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13314 \begin_inset Index idx
13317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13324 So this has no effect for the document language
13338 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13342 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13350 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13355 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13356 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13358 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13360 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13363 dialog, see section
13364 \begin_inset space ~
13368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13370 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13382 \begin_layout Subsection
13386 \begin_layout Standard
13387 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13388 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13390 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13391 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13392 choose a math font in the dialog
13394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13398 \begin_inset Index idx
13401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13402 Document ! Settings
13408 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13409 automatically selects a math font.
13410 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13411 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13420 \begin_inset space ~
13426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13431 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13432 document font is available.
13435 \begin_layout Standard
13436 Note that the math font will not be used for
13440 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13446 or by the insertion of the command
13453 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13454 \begin_inset space ~
13458 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13459 while the math characters do not.
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13464 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13467 \begin_inset space ~
13475 \begin_inset space ~
13480 in the document font settings.
13483 \begin_layout Standard
13484 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13485 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13486 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13487 font (in most cases
13488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13503 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13504 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13512 \begin_inset space ~
13518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13524 \begin_layout Subsection
13525 Using Different Character Styles
13526 \begin_inset Index idx
13529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13536 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13548 \begin_layout Standard
13549 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13550 automatically changes the character style for certain
13551 paragraph environments.
13553 supports two character styles,
13562 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13566 \begin_layout Standard
13571 style, do one of the following:
13574 \begin_layout Itemize
13575 click on the toolbar button
13584 \begin_layout Itemize
13585 use the key binding
13594 \begin_layout Standard
13595 These commands are all toggles.
13600 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13603 \begin_layout Standard
13604 One typically uses the
13608 style for proper names.
13610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13617 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13625 \begin_layout Standard
13626 A more widely used character style is the
13631 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13638 \begin_layout Itemize
13639 clicking on the toolbar button
13648 \begin_layout Itemize
13649 using the keybindings
13658 \begin_layout Standard
13663 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13665 use a different font.
13668 \begin_layout Standard
13669 We've been using the
13673 style all over the place in this document.
13674 Here's one more example:
13677 \begin_layout Quotation
13680 Do not overuse character styles!
13683 \begin_layout Standard
13684 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13685 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13686 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13687 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13702 \begin_inset space ~
13705 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13711 arg "dialog-show character"
13717 \begin_layout Subsection
13718 Fine-Tuning with the
13723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13725 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13730 \begin_inset Index idx
13733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13742 \begin_layout Standard
13743 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13745 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13746 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13747 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13748 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13749 from ordinary dialog.
13752 \begin_layout Standard
13753 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13754 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13755 \begin_inset Newline newline
13758 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13759 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13763 To use custom character styles, open the
13765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13767 \begin_inset space ~
13770 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13773 dialog or press the toolbar button
13776 arg "dialog-show character"
13780 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13781 font property that you can choose.
13782 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13785 \begin_inset space ~
13790 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13795 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13796 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13797 environments all at once.
13800 \begin_layout Standard
13801 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13804 \begin_inset space ~
13816 \begin_layout Labeling
13817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13831 The possible options are:
13835 \begin_layout Labeling
13836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13841 This is the Roman font family.
13842 Normally a serif font.
13843 It's also the default family.
13853 \begin_layout Labeling
13854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13858 \begin_inset space ~
13865 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13877 \begin_layout Labeling
13878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13885 This is the Typewriter font family.
13891 arg "font-typewriter"
13900 \begin_layout Labeling
13901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13906 This corresponds to the print weight.
13911 \begin_layout Labeling
13912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13917 This is the Medium font series.
13918 It's also the default series.
13921 \begin_layout Labeling
13922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13929 This is the Bold font series.
13942 \begin_layout Labeling
13943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13948 As the name implies.
13953 \begin_layout Labeling
13954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 This is the Upright font shape.
13960 It's also the default shape.
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13978 s the Italic font shape
13984 \begin_layout Labeling
13985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13992 This is the Slanted font shape
13994 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13995 , this is different from italic).
13998 \begin_layout Labeling
13999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14003 \begin_inset space ~
14010 This is the Small caps font shape
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14023 Alters the text color.
14024 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14028 \begin_inset space ~
14033 , which means that the document default color set in
14035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14036 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14042 \begin_inset space ~
14047 is used, you can choose between
14124 \begin_inset Index idx
14127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14136 \begin_layout Labeling
14137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14142 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14143 the language of the document.
14144 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14145 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14147 \begin_inset Newline newline
14150 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14152 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14153 When using the spell checking (see section
14154 \begin_inset space ~
14158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14160 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14164 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14167 \begin_layout Labeling
14168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14173 Alters the size of the font.
14174 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14175 proportional to the document font size.
14176 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14177 the details, but a general description of what
14183 \begin_layout Labeling
14184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14205 arg "font-size tiny"
14211 \begin_layout Labeling
14212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14233 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14239 \begin_layout Labeling
14240 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14261 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14267 \begin_layout Labeling
14268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14289 arg "font-size small"
14295 \begin_layout Labeling
14296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14310 It's also the default size.
14314 arg "font-size normal"
14320 \begin_layout Labeling
14321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14342 arg "font-size large"
14348 \begin_layout Labeling
14349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14370 arg "font-size larger"
14376 \begin_layout Labeling
14377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14398 arg "font-size largest"
14404 \begin_layout Labeling
14405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14426 arg "font-size huge"
14432 \begin_layout Labeling
14433 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14454 arg "font-size giant"
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14466 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14486 arg "font-size increase"
14492 \begin_layout Labeling
14493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14498 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14518 arg "font-size decrease"
14525 \begin_layout Standard
14530 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14531 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14533 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14534 — use those instead.
14535 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14538 \begin_layout Labeling
14539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14544 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14549 \begin_layout Labeling
14550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14557 This is text with emphasize on
14560 This might seem like the same as
14564 , but it is actually a bit different.
14570 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14572 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14575 \begin_layout Labeling
14576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14583 This is text with Underbar on.
14589 arg "font-underline"
14595 \begin_inset Newline newline
14600 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14601 when you could not change fonts.
14602 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14603 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14604 because some people
14608 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14611 \begin_layout Labeling
14612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14616 \begin_inset space ~
14623 This is text with Double underbar on.
14629 arg "font-underunderline"
14633 \begin_inset Newline newline
14636 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14637 about double underbar.
14640 \begin_layout Labeling
14641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14645 \begin_inset space ~
14652 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14658 arg "font-underwave"
14662 \begin_inset Newline newline
14665 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14666 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14669 \begin_layout Labeling
14670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14677 This is text with Strikeout on.
14683 arg "font-strikeout"
14687 \begin_inset Newline newline
14690 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14691 changed in the meantime.
14694 \begin_layout Labeling
14695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14702 This is text with Noun on.
14709 , this is a logical attribute.
14710 Normally it's equivalent to
14713 \begin_inset space ~
14722 \begin_layout Standard
14723 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14724 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14726 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14728 \begin_inset space ~
14731 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14737 arg "dialog-show character"
14740 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14741 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14744 arg "textstyle-apply"
14748 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14752 \begin_layout Standard
14753 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14760 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14761 (suppose you just set the shape to
14762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14792 \begin_layout Standard
14793 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14801 \begin_inset space ~
14813 \begin_layout Itemize
14819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14826 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14844 \begin_inset Newline newline
14848 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14862 \begin_inset Note Note
14865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14866 For more on phantoms see section
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14873 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14883 \begin_inset Newline newline
14889 \begin_layout Itemize
14894 fonts use characters with serifs.
14895 These are the small
14896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14903 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14904 The following example shows the difference:
14905 \begin_inset Newline newline
14909 \begin_inset Newline newline
14914 text without serifs
14917 \begin_inset Newline newline
14920 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14921 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14928 \begin_layout Itemize
14933 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14934 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14935 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14938 \begin_layout Standard
14939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14946 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14947 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14950 \begin_inset space ~
14955 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14956 the property to be removed.
14957 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14958 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14959 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14977 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14978 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14986 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14990 \begin_inset space ~
14995 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15006 If you, for example, set
15007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15025 \begin_inset space ~
15030 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15039 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15042 \begin_layout Standard
15043 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15044 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15047 \begin_layout Section
15048 Printing and Previewing
15051 \begin_layout Subsection
15055 \begin_layout Standard
15056 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15057 using \SpecialChar LyX
15058 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15059 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15060 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15061 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15063 Additional Features
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15070 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15073 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15074 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15075 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15078 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15079 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15080 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15081 to turn your writing into printable output.
15082 This happens in two stages:
15085 \begin_layout Enumerate
15086 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15087 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15089 a file with the extension,
15090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15104 \begin_layout Enumerate
15105 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15106 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15107 to use the commands in the
15111 file to produce printable output.
15114 \begin_layout Subsection
15115 Output file formats
15116 \begin_inset Index idx
15119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15128 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15136 Simple text (ASCII)
15137 \begin_inset Index idx
15140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15141 File formats ! ASCII
15149 \begin_layout Standard
15150 This file type has the extension
15151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15163 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15167 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15174 \begin_layout Standard
15175 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15177 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15178 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15186 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15187 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15188 bibliography (section
15189 \begin_inset space ~
15193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15195 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15200 If your document includes such material, use
15202 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15203 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15205 \begin_inset space ~
15209 \begin_inset space ~
15213 \begin_inset space ~
15221 \begin_inset space ~
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15231 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15232 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15238 \begin_inset Index idx
15241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15242 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15251 \begin_layout Standard
15252 This file type has the extension
15253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15264 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15267 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15268 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15269 -Errors or to process it manually
15270 with console commands.
15271 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15272 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15273 's temporary directory whenever you
15274 view or export your document.
15277 \begin_layout Standard
15278 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15279 -file using the menu
15281 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15282 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15286 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15287 export variants are explained in section
15288 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15294 reference "subsec:Export"
15301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15303 \begin_inset Index idx
15306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15315 \begin_layout Standard
15316 This file type has the extension
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15337 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15338 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15339 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15343 \begin_layout Standard
15344 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15345 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15346 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15347 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15348 when you view the DVI.
15349 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15352 \begin_layout Standard
15353 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15355 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15356 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15361 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15362 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15364 \begin_inset space ~
15370 The latter option uses the program
15372 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15378 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15381 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15382 font access (see section
15383 \begin_inset space ~
15387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15389 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15394 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15395 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15402 \begin_inset Index idx
15405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15406 File formats ! PostScript
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 This file type has the extension
15416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15428 PostScript was developed by the company
15432 as a printer language.
15433 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15435 PostScript can be seen as a
15436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15439 programming language
15440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15443 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15448 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15455 \begin_inset Index idx
15458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15460 -packages ! pstricks
15470 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15478 Encapsulated PostScript
15479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15482 (EPS, file extension
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 As \SpecialChar LyX
15496 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15497 convert them in the background to EPS.
15498 If, for example, you have 50
15499 \begin_inset space ~
15502 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15504 \begin_inset space ~
15507 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15508 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15510 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15511 EPS to avoid this problem.
15514 \begin_layout Standard
15515 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15517 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15518 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15526 \begin_inset Index idx
15529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15536 \begin_inset Index idx
15539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15548 \begin_layout Standard
15549 This file type has the extension
15550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 Portable Document Format
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15574 was derived from PostScript.
15575 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15584 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15585 looks exactly the same.
15588 \begin_layout Standard
15589 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15593 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 (JPG, file extension
15598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15625 Portable Network Graphics
15626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 (PNG, file extension
15630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15642 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15643 converts them in the
15644 background to one of these formats.
15645 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15646 will slow down your workflow.
15647 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15650 \begin_layout Standard
15651 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15659 \begin_layout Description
15661 \begin_inset space ~
15664 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15668 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15671 \begin_layout Description
15673 \begin_inset space ~
15680 ) This uses the program
15682 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15685 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15688 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15691 is a new engine, derived from
15695 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15696 access (see section
15697 \begin_inset space ~
15701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15703 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15708 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15709 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15714 \begin_layout Description
15716 \begin_inset space ~
15723 ) This uses the program
15728 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15734 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15735 font access (see section
15736 \begin_inset space ~
15740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15742 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15747 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15748 vertically written Japanese.
15751 \begin_layout Description
15753 \begin_inset space ~
15756 (cropped) This is the same as
15759 \begin_inset space ~
15764 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15765 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15766 to generate good-looking
15767 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15770 \begin_layout Description
15772 \begin_inset space ~
15775 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15779 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15783 \begin_layout Description
15785 \begin_inset space ~
15788 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15792 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15793 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15797 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15798 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15801 \begin_layout Standard
15805 \begin_inset space ~
15814 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15815 works without problems.
15816 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15817 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15821 \begin_inset space ~
15829 \begin_inset space ~
15834 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15844 \begin_inset Index idx
15847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15848 FileFormats ! XHTML
15854 \begin_inset Index idx
15857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15866 \begin_layout Standard
15867 This file type has the extension
15868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15880 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15881 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15882 When \SpecialChar LyX
15883 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15884 suitable for the purpose.
15885 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15891 between different formats, which are described in section
15893 Math Output in XHTML
15898 \begin_inset space ~
15906 \begin_layout Standard
15907 XHTML output remains
15908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15915 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15916 features are supported yet.
15920 and the World Wide Web
15924 Additional Features
15926 manual, for more information.
15929 \begin_layout Standard
15930 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15932 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15933 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15939 \begin_layout Subsection
15941 \begin_inset Index idx
15944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15953 \begin_layout Standard
15954 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15955 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15964 or use the toolbar button
15971 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15972 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15979 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15983 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15991 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15996 Further output formats can be selected via
15998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15999 View (Other Formats)
16001 or the toolbar button
16010 \begin_layout Standard
16011 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16012 viewer window using the menu
16014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16020 Update (Other Formats)
16025 \begin_layout Standard
16026 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16029 To have a real output, export your document.
16032 \begin_layout Section
16033 A few Words about Typography
16034 \begin_inset Index idx
16037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16046 \begin_layout Subsection
16047 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16048 \begin_inset Index idx
16051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16058 \begin_inset Index idx
16061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16070 \begin_layout Standard
16071 In \SpecialChar LyX
16073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16084 character comes in four lengths: the
16096 , and the minus sign:
16097 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16103 \begin_layout Standard
16104 \begin_inset Tabular
16105 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16106 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16107 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16108 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16109 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16110 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16139 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16179 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16206 \begin_inset space ~
16209 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16216 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16243 \begin_inset space ~
16246 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16267 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16301 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16307 \begin_layout Standard
16308 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16320 character multiple times in a row.
16321 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16322 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16355 \begin_layout Standard
16356 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16357 math mode and has a length of its own.
16358 Here are some examples:
16361 \begin_layout Enumerate
16362 line- and page-breaks
16363 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16373 \begin_layout Enumerate
16375 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16385 \begin_layout Enumerate
16386 Oh — there's a dash.
16387 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16397 \begin_layout Enumerate
16398 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16402 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16412 \begin_layout Subsection
16414 \begin_inset Index idx
16417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16426 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16433 \begin_layout Standard
16434 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16435 but automatically in the output.
16436 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16442 \begin_inset Index idx
16445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16452 following the rules of the document language.
16455 \begin_layout Standard
16457 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16461 font and with unusual constructs, like
16462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16470 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16471 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16472 This is done with the menu
16474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16475 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16477 \begin_inset space ~
16483 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16485 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16489 \begin_layout Standard
16490 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16491 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16502 would then see the hyphen
16503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16510 as a hyphenation possibility.
16511 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16512 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16513 as described in section
16514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16517 Prevent Hyphenation
16518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16524 \begin_inset space ~
16532 \begin_layout Subsection
16534 \begin_inset Index idx
16537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16547 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16550 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16557 \begin_layout Standard
16558 When \SpecialChar LyX
16559 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16562 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16568 appropriate amount of space.
16569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16572 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16574 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16575 gets after another word.
16578 \begin_layout Standard
16579 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16580 not work in all cases.
16582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16593 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16594 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16597 \begin_layout Standard
16598 Here are some examples of
16602 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16605 \begin_layout Itemize
16610 \begin_layout Itemize
16615 \begin_layout Standard
16616 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16619 \begin_layout Itemize
16621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16625 this is too much space!
16628 \begin_layout Itemize
16633 \begin_layout Standard
16634 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16637 \begin_layout Standard
16638 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16641 \begin_layout Enumerate
16645 \begin_inset space ~
16650 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16651 \begin_inset space ~
16655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16657 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16662 \begin_inset Index idx
16665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16666 Spaces ! inter-word
16674 \begin_layout Enumerate
16678 \begin_inset space ~
16683 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16684 \begin_inset space ~
16688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16690 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16695 \begin_inset Index idx
16698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16707 \begin_layout Enumerate
16711 \begin_inset space ~
16715 \begin_inset space ~
16719 \begin_inset space ~
16726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16728 \begin_inset space ~
16733 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16734 This function is also bound to
16737 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16743 \begin_layout Standard
16744 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16747 \begin_layout Itemize
16749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16753 \begin_inset space \space{}
16756 this is too much space!
16759 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16764 \begin_layout Standard
16765 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16766 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16768 will take care of this.
16771 \begin_layout Standard
16772 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16782 feature described in the section
16784 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16789 Additional Features
16794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16796 \begin_inset Index idx
16799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 Typography ! Quotes
16806 \begin_inset Index idx
16809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16840 \begin_layout Standard
16842 usually sets quotes correctly.
16843 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16844 and use a closing quote at the end.
16846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16854 The keyboard character,
16858 , generates this automatically.
16861 \begin_layout Standard
16862 You can specify what character the
16866 key produces using the submenu
16872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16876 \begin_inset Index idx
16879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16880 Document ! Settings
16890 There are six choices:
16893 \begin_layout Labeling
16894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16917 \begin_layout Labeling
16918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16921 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16925 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16931 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16935 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16941 \begin_layout Labeling
16942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16945 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16949 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16955 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16959 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16965 \begin_layout Labeling
16966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16969 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16973 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16979 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16983 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16989 \begin_layout Labeling
16990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16993 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16997 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17003 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17007 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17013 \begin_layout Labeling
17014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17017 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17021 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17027 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17031 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17037 \begin_layout Standard
17038 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17041 arg "quote-insert single"
17047 \begin_layout Subsection
17049 \begin_inset Index idx
17052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17053 Typography ! Ligatures
17059 \begin_inset Index idx
17062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17093 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17100 \begin_layout Standard
17101 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17102 print them as single characters.
17103 These groups are known as
17108 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17109 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17111 Here are the standard ligatures:
17114 \begin_layout Itemize
17118 \begin_layout Itemize
17122 \begin_layout Itemize
17126 \begin_layout Itemize
17130 \begin_layout Itemize
17134 \begin_layout Standard
17135 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17138 \begin_layout Standard
17139 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17140 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17148 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 To break a ligature, use
17166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17167 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17169 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17187 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17204 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17212 \begin_layout Subsection
17214 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17216 \begin_inset Index idx
17219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17229 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17243 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17246 \begin_layout Description
17248 The name of the game.
17251 \begin_layout Description
17253 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17257 \begin_layout Description
17259 The \SpecialChar TeX
17260 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17264 \begin_layout Description
17265 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17266 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17270 \begin_layout Standard
17271 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17277 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17285 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17286 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17287 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17288 converges to the number
17289 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17292 : The actual version is
17293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17301 , the previous one was
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17313 \begin_layout Subsection
17315 \begin_inset Index idx
17318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_layout Standard
17328 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17329 space between two words.
17330 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17340 for units use the menu
17342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17345 \begin_inset space ~
17353 arg "space-insert thin"
17359 \begin_layout Standard
17360 Here is an example to show the differences:
17363 \begin_layout Standard
17364 \begin_inset Tabular
17365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17366 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17367 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17368 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17375 \begin_inset space ~
17379 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17391 space between number and unit
17398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17407 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17419 half space between number and unit
17432 \begin_layout Subsection
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17438 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17449 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17450 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17451 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17452 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17453 These bits of text became known as
17464 \begin_layout Standard
17465 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17466 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17467 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17468 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17469 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17470 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17471 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17472 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17473 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17474 \begin_inset Newline newline
17482 \begin_inset Newline newline
17490 \begin_inset Newline newline
17493 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17494 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17495 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17497 \begin_inset space ~
17501 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17503 key "latexcompanion"
17508 \begin_inset space ~
17512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17518 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17519 's page break mechanism.
17522 \begin_layout Chapter
17523 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17526 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17533 \begin_layout Standard
17534 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17537 \begin_inset space ~
17543 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17546 \begin_layout Section
17548 \begin_inset Index idx
17551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17569 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17572 \begin_layout Description
17575 \begin_inset space ~
17578 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17579 \begin_inset Newline newline
17583 \begin_inset Note Note
17586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17587 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17595 \begin_layout Description
17596 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17597 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17601 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17602 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17604 \begin_inset space ~
17610 \begin_inset Newline newline
17614 \begin_inset Note Comment
17617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17627 \begin_layout Description
17629 \begin_inset space ~
17632 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17633 set in the document settings under
17635 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17637 \begin_inset space ~
17643 \begin_inset Newline newline
17647 \begin_inset Newline newline
17651 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17661 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17666 of a comment that appears in the output.
17672 \begin_inset Newline newline
17676 \begin_inset Newline newline
17679 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17682 \begin_layout Standard
17683 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17695 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17698 \begin_layout Section
17700 \begin_inset Index idx
17703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17712 name "sec:Footnotes"
17719 \begin_layout Standard
17721 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17727 or the toolbar button
17730 arg "footnote-insert"
17742 \begin_inset Graphics
17743 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17752 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17753 's representation of your footnote.
17763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17782 label, the box will
17786 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17787 Clicking on the box label again will close
17800 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17801 and click on the footnote
17816 \begin_layout Standard
17817 Here is an example footnote:
17825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17826 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17834 \begin_layout Standard
17835 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17836 position where the footnote box is placed.
17837 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17838 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17839 according to the document class.
17841 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17842 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17848 ey are described in the
17851 \begin_inset space ~
17859 \begin_layout Section
17861 \begin_inset Index idx
17864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17873 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17880 \begin_layout Standard
17881 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17883 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17887 \begin_inset space ~
17892 or the toolbar button
17895 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17921 appearing within your text.
17922 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17923 's representation of your margin
17932 \begin_layout Standard
17933 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17937 \begin_inset Marginal
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17942 This is a marginal note.
17950 \begin_layout Standard
17951 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17952 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17953 pages, right on odd pages.
17956 \begin_layout Standard
17957 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17960 \begin_inset space ~
17968 \begin_inset space ~
17976 \begin_layout Section
17977 Graphics and Images
17978 \begin_inset Index idx
17981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18000 name "sec:Graphics"
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18009 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18012 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18021 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18024 \begin_layout Standard
18025 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18030 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18031 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18033 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18040 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18052 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18053 of the image in the output.
18054 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18058 \begin_inset space ~
18062 \begin_inset space ~
18071 \begin_inset space ~
18075 \begin_inset space ~
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18084 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18085 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18093 \begin_layout Standard
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18106 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18107 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18109 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18114 \begin_inset space ~
18119 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18120 with the image size is printed.
18123 \begin_layout Standard
18124 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18125 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18127 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18130 \begin_layout Standard
18132 \begin_inset Graphics
18133 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18141 \begin_layout Standard
18142 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18143 the image into a float, see section
18144 \begin_inset space ~
18148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18150 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18157 \begin_layout Subsection
18159 \begin_inset Index idx
18162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18171 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18178 \begin_layout Standard
18179 You can insert images in any known file format.
18180 But as we explained in section
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18187 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18191 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18193 therefore uses the program
18197 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18198 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18199 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18200 \begin_inset space ~
18204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18206 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18213 \begin_layout Standard
18214 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18217 \begin_layout Description
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18222 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18223 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18224 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18228 Graphics Interchange Format
18229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18232 (GIF, file extension
18233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18245 \begin_inset Index idx
18248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18280 Portable Network Graphics
18281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18284 (PNG, file extension
18285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 \begin_inset Index idx
18300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18332 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18336 (JPG, file extension
18337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_inset Index idx
18364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18395 \begin_layout Description
18397 \begin_inset space ~
18400 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18402 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18403 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18404 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18405 \begin_inset Newline newline
18408 Scalable image formats can be
18409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 Scalable Vector Graphics
18413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 (SVG, file extension
18417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18429 \begin_inset Index idx
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 Encapsulated PostScript
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 (EPS, file extension
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18481 \begin_inset Index idx
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18516 Portable Document Format
18517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18520 (PDF, file extension
18521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18533 \begin_inset Index idx
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18551 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18552 result will not be scalable.
18553 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18567 \begin_layout Standard
18568 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18575 \begin_layout Subsection
18576 Grouping of Image Settings
18577 \begin_inset Index idx
18580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 Images ! Settings grouping
18589 \begin_layout Standard
18590 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18592 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18593 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18595 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18596 need to manually change each of them.
18600 \begin_layout Standard
18601 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18604 \begin_inset space ~
18608 \begin_inset space ~
18620 \begin_inset space ~
18624 \begin_inset space ~
18630 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18631 and checking the name of the desired group.
18634 \begin_layout Section
18636 \begin_inset Index idx
18639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18655 \begin_layout Standard
18656 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18659 arg "tabular-insert"
18664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18668 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18669 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18670 from the rest of the table.
18671 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18672 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18674 Here is an example table:
18677 \begin_layout Standard
18679 \begin_inset Tabular
18680 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18681 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 \begin_layout Subsection
18889 \begin_layout Standard
18890 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18893 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18897 This brings up the table dialog.
18898 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18899 cursor is placed currently.
18900 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18901 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18902 done on all of your selection.
18905 \begin_layout Standard
18906 In addition to the table dialog, the
18909 \begin_inset space ~
18914 helps you in setting table properties.
18915 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18922 \begin_inset space ~
18927 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18928 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18929 current cell respectively.
18930 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18932 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18933 of text, see section
18934 \begin_inset space ~
18938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18940 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18947 \begin_layout Standard
18948 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18949 using the check box
18958 This will merge the cells to
18962 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18963 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18964 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18965 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18966 in the last row without the upper border:
18969 \begin_layout Standard
18971 \begin_inset Tabular
18972 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18973 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18974 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18975 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18977 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19073 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19108 \begin_layout Standard
19109 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19110 -arguments for the table.
19111 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19112 explained in the chapter
19119 \begin_inset space ~
19125 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19126 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19127 but are visible in the output.
19130 \begin_layout Standard
19131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 Most DVI-viewers are
19143 able to display rotations.
19151 \begin_layout Standard
19156 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19161 adds lines for all cell borders.
19164 \begin_layout Subsection
19166 \begin_inset Index idx
19169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19170 Tables ! Longtables
19176 \begin_inset Index idx
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 \begin_layout Standard
19189 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19192 \begin_inset space ~
19196 \begin_inset space ~
19205 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19206 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19209 \begin_layout Description
19214 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19215 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19216 except for the first page, if
19219 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_layout Description
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19236 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19237 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19240 \begin_layout Description
19245 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19246 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19247 except for the last page, if
19250 \begin_inset space ~
19258 \begin_layout Description
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19267 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19268 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19271 \begin_layout Description
19272 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19273 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19279 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19290 \begin_layout Standard
19291 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19292 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19293 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19299 In this context, first means first in this order:
19302 \begin_inset space ~
19314 \begin_inset space ~
19319 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19322 \begin_layout Standard
19324 \begin_inset Tabular
19325 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19326 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19327 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19328 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19329 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19330 <row endfirsthead="true">
19331 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19342 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19351 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19361 <row endfirsthead="true">
19362 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19373 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19382 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19394 <row endhead="true">
19395 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19415 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 <row endhead="true">
19426 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19446 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 <row endfoot="true">
19459 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <row endlastfoot="true">
21441 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 \begin_layout Subsection
21480 \begin_inset Index idx
21483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21492 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21499 \begin_layout Standard
21500 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21501 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21502 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21503 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21507 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21510 \begin_layout Standard
21511 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21512 for the column in the table dialog.
21513 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21514 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21518 \begin_layout Standard
21520 \begin_inset Tabular
21521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21522 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21523 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21524 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21525 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 This is longer now.
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21727 This is longer now.
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 \begin_layout Standard
21759 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21760 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21765 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21766 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21772 Selection with the mouse or with
21776 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21777 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21778 the selection from outside the table.
21781 \begin_layout Section
21783 \begin_inset Index idx
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21802 \begin_layout Subsection
21806 \begin_layout Standard
21807 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21808 have a fixed location.
21810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21817 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21825 \begin_inset space ~
21830 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21831 too many notes on the current page.
21834 \begin_layout Standard
21835 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21836 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21837 and pages without text.
21838 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21839 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21840 Floats are therefore numbered.
21841 Referencing is described in section
21842 \begin_inset space ~
21846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21848 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21855 \begin_layout Standard
21856 To insert a float, use the menu
21858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21862 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21863 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21865 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21866 \begin_inset Index idx
21869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21876 paragraph within the float.
21877 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21878 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21879 left-clicking on the box label.
21880 A closed float box looks like this:
21881 \begin_inset Graphics
21882 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21887 – a gray button with a red label.
21890 \begin_layout Standard
21891 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21893 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21896 \begin_layout Subsection
21898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21900 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21905 \begin_inset Index idx
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21909 Floats ! Figure floats
21917 \begin_layout Standard
21919 \begin_inset space ~
21923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21925 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21929 was created using the menu
21931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21932 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21938 arg "float-insert figure"
21942 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21951 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21955 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21956 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21960 \begin_inset space ~
21968 arg "layout-paragraph"
21974 \begin_layout Standard
21975 \begin_inset Float figure
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 \begin_inset Graphics
21983 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21998 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22002 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22015 \begin_layout Standard
22016 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22017 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22028 ) and refer to it using the menu
22030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22036 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22040 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22041 vague references like
22042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22049 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22050 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22060 For more about cross-references, see section
22061 \begin_inset space ~
22065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22067 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22074 \begin_layout Standard
22075 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22076 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22077 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22078 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22079 as described in section
22080 \begin_inset space ~
22084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22086 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22092 \begin_inset space ~
22096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22098 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22102 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22103 You can also set the images one below the other.
22105 \begin_inset space ~
22109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22111 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22118 reference "fig:Platypus"
22122 are the subfigures.
22125 \begin_layout Standard
22126 \begin_inset Float figure
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22136 \begin_inset Float figure
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22147 name "fig:Undefinable"
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 \begin_inset Graphics
22161 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22172 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22176 \begin_inset Float figure
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22187 name "fig:Platypus"
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \begin_inset Graphics
22201 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22213 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22225 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22229 Two distorted images.
22242 \begin_layout Subsection
22244 \begin_inset Index idx
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 Floats ! Table floats
22256 \begin_layout Standard
22257 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22260 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22263 or the toolbar button
22266 arg "float-insert table"
22270 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22271 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22272 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22274 \begin_inset space ~
22278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22280 reference "tab:Table-float"
22287 \begin_layout Standard
22288 \begin_inset Float table
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22299 name "tab:Table-float"
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_inset Tabular
22314 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22315 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22316 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22317 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22318 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22469 \end{array}\right]$
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22511 \begin_layout Subsection
22513 \begin_inset Index idx
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 \begin_layout Standard
22527 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22528 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22529 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22531 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22539 \begin_inset space ~
22547 \begin_layout Section
22549 \begin_inset Index idx
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 \begin_layout Standard
22563 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22565 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22566 \begin_inset space \space{}
22573 \begin_layout Standard
22574 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22575 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22581 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22582 and its alignment within the page.
22585 \begin_layout Standard
22587 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22597 height_special "totalheight"
22602 backgroundcolor "none"
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 This is a minipage.
22609 The text is set in an italic style.
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22616 another formatting.
22624 \begin_layout Standard
22625 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22628 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22632 as described in section
22633 \begin_inset space ~
22637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22639 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22644 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22650 \begin_layout Standard
22651 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22661 height_special "totalheight"
22666 backgroundcolor "none"
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22671 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22677 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22681 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22691 height_special "totalheight"
22696 backgroundcolor "none"
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22701 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22709 \begin_layout Standard
22710 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22717 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22719 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22726 \begin_inset space ~
22734 \begin_layout Chapter
22735 Mathematical Formulas
22736 \begin_inset Index idx
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 \begin_inset Index idx
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22780 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22787 \begin_layout Standard
22788 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22793 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22796 \begin_layout Section
22798 \begin_inset Index idx
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 \begin_layout Standard
22811 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22824 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22826 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22827 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22828 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22836 \begin_layout Standard
22837 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22841 \begin_inset space ~
22846 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22849 \begin_layout Standard
22850 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22851 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22854 \begin_layout Standard
22855 This is a line with an inline formula
22856 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22862 \begin_layout Standard
22863 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22864 paragraph, like this one:
22865 \begin_inset Formula
22872 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22875 \begin_layout Standard
22877 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22879 For example, typing
22880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22893 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22894 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22898 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22901 \begin_inset space ~
22909 \begin_layout Subsection
22910 Navigating in Formulas
22911 \begin_inset Index idx
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 \begin_layout Standard
22924 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22925 achieved with the arrow keys.
22927 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22928 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22933 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22934 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22938 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22942 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22945 \end{array}\right]$
22953 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22958 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22959 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22967 , printed in this document as
22968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22972 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22979 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22980 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22981 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22986 For example, if you want
22987 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22995 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23005 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23009 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23014 , since in the latter case only the
23017 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23022 will be under the square root sign:
23023 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23029 \begin_layout Standard
23030 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23032 \begin_inset Formula
23034 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23043 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23044 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23047 \begin_layout Subsection
23051 \begin_layout Standard
23052 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23053 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23057 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23058 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23059 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23060 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23061 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23065 \begin_layout Subsection
23066 Exponents and Subscripts
23067 \begin_inset Index idx
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 \begin_inset Index idx
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 \begin_layout Standard
23090 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23093 arg "math-superscript"
23099 arg "math-subscript"
23102 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23104 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23107 , type in a formula
23110 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23120 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23126 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23130 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23136 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23142 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23151 , you have to use an extra
23155 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23156 For example, if you want
23157 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23163 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23169 Subscripts are similar: To get
23170 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23176 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23184 \begin_layout Subsection
23186 \begin_inset Index idx
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 \begin_layout Standard
23199 Create a fraction either with the command
23205 or by using the icon
23208 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23214 \begin_inset space ~
23220 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23221 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23222 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23227 To move back up, press
23232 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23233 \begin_inset Formula
23235 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23238 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23246 \begin_layout Subsection
23248 \begin_inset Index idx
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 \begin_layout Standard
23261 Roots can be created using the
23264 \begin_inset space ~
23272 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23278 arg "math-insert \\root"
23300 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23306 always produces a square root.
23309 \begin_layout Subsection
23310 Operators with Limits
23311 \begin_inset Index idx
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_inset Index idx
23324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23333 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23340 \begin_layout Standard
23342 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23346 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23349 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23350 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23351 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23352 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23353 The sum operator will automatically place its
23354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23361 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23363 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23367 \begin_inset Formula
23369 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23374 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23378 \begin_layout Standard
23379 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23381 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23382 behind the operator and using the menu
23384 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23385 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23387 \begin_inset space ~
23391 \begin_inset space ~
23405 \begin_layout Standard
23406 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23415 \begin_inset Index idx
23418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23425 \begin_inset Formula
23427 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23432 which will place the
23433 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23445 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23446 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23453 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23460 Have a look at section
23461 \begin_inset space ~
23465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23467 reference "subsec:Functions"
23471 for an explanation of function macros.
23474 \begin_layout Subsection
23476 \begin_inset Index idx
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23488 \begin_layout Standard
23489 Most math symbols can be found in the
23492 \begin_inset space ~
23497 under one of several categories; including
23514 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23518 \begin_layout Standard
23519 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23520 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23521 don't have to use the
23524 \begin_inset space ~
23529 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23531 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23534 \begin_layout Subsection
23536 \begin_inset Index idx
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 \begin_layout Standard
23549 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23555 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23561 \begin_inset space ~
23569 arg "math-insert \\space"
23573 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23574 For example, the sequence
23579 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23582 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23584 \begin_inset Graphics
23585 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23590 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23591 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23592 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23593 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23594 , because they are negative
23596 Here are two examples:
23599 \begin_layout Standard
23609 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23615 \begin_layout Standard
23625 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23631 \begin_layout Subsection
23633 \begin_inset Index idx
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23645 name "subsec:Functions"
23652 \begin_layout Standard
23656 \begin_inset space ~
23661 contains under the button
23664 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23667 a number of function macros, such as
23668 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23672 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23680 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23687 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23688 avoid confusions, because
23689 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23693 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23699 \begin_layout Standard
23700 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23702 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23706 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23712 \begin_layout Standard
23713 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23714 are placed, as described in section
23715 \begin_inset space ~
23719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23721 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23728 \begin_layout Subsection
23730 \begin_inset Index idx
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 \begin_layout Standard
23743 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23745 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23746 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23747 commands, for example, to enter
23748 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23751 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23752 Our example is entered by typing
23757 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23764 \begin_inset space ~
23768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23770 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23774 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23777 \begin_layout Standard
23778 \begin_inset Float table
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23789 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23793 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 \begin_inset Tabular
23804 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23805 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24390 \begin_layout Standard
24391 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24394 \begin_inset space ~
24402 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24405 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24409 \begin_layout Section
24410 Brackets and Delimiters
24411 \begin_inset Index idx
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 \begin_inset Index idx
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24433 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24440 \begin_layout Standard
24441 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24443 For some purposes, using just the keys
24448 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24449 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24450 toolbar delimiter icon
24453 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24457 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24458 \begin_inset Formula
24460 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24468 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24469 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24473 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24476 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24482 \begin_inset Formula
24484 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24492 \begin_layout Standard
24493 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24494 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24498 \begin_layout Standard
24499 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24500 left side and right side.
24501 If you use the option
24504 \begin_inset space ~
24509 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24510 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24512 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24517 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24518 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24521 \begin_layout Standard
24522 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24523 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24524 is to go inside the brackets.
24525 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24530 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24531 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24532 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24536 arg "math-delim ( )"
24542 \begin_layout Section
24543 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 \begin_inset Index idx
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 \begin_inset Index idx
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24568 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24576 \begin_layout Standard
24577 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24581 \begin_inset space ~
24589 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24593 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24594 Here is an example:
24595 \begin_inset Formula
24597 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24606 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24607 \begin_inset space ~
24611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24613 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24618 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24619 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24620 This alignment is set in the box
24625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24674 for every column as default.
24675 For example, the sequence
24676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24687 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24688 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24689 corresponds to the relevant column.
24690 The result will look like this:
24691 \begin_inset Formula
24694 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24695 column & has & has\,right\\
24696 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24705 \begin_layout Standard
24706 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24709 arg "newline-insert newline"
24712 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24713 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24718 or the math toolbar.
24721 \begin_layout Standard
24722 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24723 It can be created with the menu
24725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24726 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24728 \begin_inset space ~
24740 Here is an example:
24741 \begin_inset Formula
24755 \begin_layout Standard
24756 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24759 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24762 arg "newline-insert newline"
24766 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24771 arg "newline-insert newline"
24774 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24782 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24783 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24784 A new row is created by every further entry of
24787 arg "newline-insert newline"
24791 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24792 Here is an example:
24793 \begin_inset Formula
24795 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24796 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24801 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24802 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24803 \begin_inset Formula
24805 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24813 \begin_layout Standard
24814 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24821 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24822 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24825 reference "eq:asquared"
24830 The other types are described in section
24831 \begin_inset space ~
24835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24837 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24844 \begin_layout Section
24845 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24846 \begin_inset Index idx
24849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24850 Math ! Formula numbering
24856 \begin_inset Index idx
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 Math ! Referencing formulas
24866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24868 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24875 \begin_layout Standard
24876 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24878 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24879 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24881 \begin_inset space ~
24885 \begin_inset space ~
24893 arg "math-number-toggle"
24897 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24898 within parentheses.
24899 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24900 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24901 the document class.
24902 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24903 separated by a dot:
24904 \begin_inset Formula
24914 arg "math-number-toggle"
24917 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24918 You can only number displayed formulas.
24921 \begin_layout Standard
24922 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24925 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24927 \begin_inset space ~
24931 \begin_inset space ~
24939 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24942 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24943 \begin_inset Formula
24946 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24952 To number all lines use the shortcut
24955 arg "math-number-toggle"
24961 \begin_layout Standard
24962 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24965 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24966 A label is inserted with the menu
24968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24977 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24978 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24979 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24991 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24992 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24993 We inserted in the following example the label
24994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25001 in the second line:
25002 \begin_inset Formula
25004 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25005 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25010 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25011 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25012 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25024 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25028 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25029 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25030 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25031 as the formula number:
25034 \begin_layout Standard
25035 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25038 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25045 \begin_layout Standard
25046 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25047 's cross-reference box are described in section
25048 \begin_inset space ~
25052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25054 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25059 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25067 \begin_layout Section
25068 User defined math macros
25069 \begin_inset Index idx
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25081 \begin_layout Standard
25083 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25084 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25085 Math macros are explained in section
25088 \begin_inset space ~
25100 \begin_layout Section
25104 \begin_layout Subsection
25106 \begin_inset Index idx
25109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25118 \begin_layout Standard
25119 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25120 To set a font in a formula, use the
25123 \begin_inset space ~
25131 arg "math-insert \\font"
25134 , or enter its command, listed in table
25135 \begin_inset space ~
25139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25141 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25148 \begin_layout Standard
25149 \begin_inset Float table
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25160 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25164 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 \begin_inset Tabular
25175 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25176 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25237 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 \begin_layout Standard
25447 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25455 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25471 \begin_layout Standard
25472 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25473 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25478 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25479 space when you need a space in the box.
25480 Here is an example where
25481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25492 denotes the set of numbers:
25493 \begin_inset Formula
25495 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25503 \begin_layout Standard
25504 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25505 You can, for example, put a character in
25514 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25518 \begin_inset Newline newline
25521 So it is better not to use this feature.
25524 \begin_layout Standard
25525 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25526 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25530 \begin_inset Newline newline
25533 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25539 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25540 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25546 \begin_layout Standard
25553 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25556 \begin_layout Standard
25557 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25559 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25560 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25562 \begin_inset space ~
25570 \begin_layout Subsection
25572 \begin_inset Index idx
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_layout Standard
25585 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25587 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25591 \begin_inset space ~
25595 \begin_inset space ~
25603 \begin_inset space ~
25611 arg "math-insert \\font"
25615 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25616 in black instead of blue.
25617 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25618 Here is an example:
25619 \begin_inset Formula
25622 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25623 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25632 \begin_layout Subsection
25634 \begin_inset Index idx
25637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25648 automatically chosen in most situations.
25666 For most characters,
25674 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25675 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25680 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25681 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25682 thinks are appropriate.
25683 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25686 arg "math-insert \\style"
25690 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25691 For example, you can set
25692 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25695 , which is normally in
25704 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25708 The four styles are used in the following example:
25711 \begin_layout Standard
25712 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25716 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25720 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25724 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25730 \begin_layout Standard
25731 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25732 is set in a particular size with the menu
25734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25736 \begin_inset space ~
25741 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25742 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25743 will be adjusted to correspond.
25744 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25755 \begin_layout Standard
25759 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25765 \begin_layout Section
25766 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25768 \begin_inset Index idx
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 \begin_inset Index idx
25781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 \begin_layout Standard
25792 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25793 that are in common use.
25796 \begin_layout Subsection
25797 Enabling AMS-Support
25800 \begin_layout Standard
25801 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25802 the document by selecting the checkbox
25805 \begin_inset space ~
25809 \begin_inset space ~
25813 \begin_inset space ~
25820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25824 \begin_inset Index idx
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 Document ! Settings
25836 \begin_inset space ~
25842 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25843 -errors in formulas,
25844 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25847 \begin_layout Subsection
25849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25851 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25856 \begin_inset Index idx
25859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25860 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25868 \begin_layout Standard
25869 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25870 provides a selection of different formula types.
25872 allows you to choose between
25893 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25894 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25900 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25903 \begin_layout Chapter
25907 \begin_layout Section
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25921 name "sec:Cross-References"
25928 \begin_layout Standard
25929 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25930 's strengths is cross-references.
25931 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25933 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25934 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25935 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25938 \begin_layout Enumerate
25942 \begin_layout Enumerate
25943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25945 name "enu:Second-item"
25952 \begin_layout Enumerate
25956 \begin_layout Standard
25957 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25962 or by pressing the toolbar button
25969 A gray label box like this:
25970 \begin_inset Graphics
25971 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25976 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25978 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26013 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26014 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26030 \begin_layout Standard
26031 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26036 or the toolbar button
26039 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26043 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26044 \begin_inset Graphics
26045 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26050 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26052 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26065 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26069 \begin_layout Standard
26070 As an alternative to
26072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26075 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26080 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26081 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26083 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26095 \begin_layout Standard
26096 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26103 reference "enu:Second-item"
26110 \begin_layout Standard
26111 It is recommended to use a protected space
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 described in section
26117 \begin_inset space ~
26121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26123 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26132 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26133 line breaks between them.
26136 \begin_layout Standard
26137 There are six formats of cross-references:
26140 \begin_layout Description
26141 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26144 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26151 \begin_layout Description
26152 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26153 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26165 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26172 \begin_layout Description
26173 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26174 \begin_inset space ~
26178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26179 LatexCommand pageref
26180 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26187 \begin_layout Description
26189 \begin_inset space ~
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26196 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26198 LatexCommand vpageref
26199 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26204 \begin_inset Newline newline
26207 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26208 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26209 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26210 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26211 it prints “on the next page”.
26212 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26215 \begin_layout Description
26217 \begin_inset space ~
26221 \begin_inset space ~
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26228 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26231 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26236 \begin_inset Newline newline
26239 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26245 ; otherwise it behaves like
26249 \begin_inset space ~
26253 \begin_inset space ~
26262 \begin_layout Description
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26267 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26268 \begin_inset Newline newline
26272 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26290 \begin_inset Index idx
26293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 -packages ! prettyref
26301 \begin_inset Index idx
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 -packages ! refstyle
26317 \begin_inset Newline newline
26320 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26321 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26324 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26328 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26329 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26337 is the default and preferred because
26341 supports only English documents.
26342 The format is specified by using the command
26354 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26355 preamble of the document.
26356 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26369 ) can be done with this command
26370 \begin_inset Newline newline
26377 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26382 \begin_inset Newline newline
26385 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26387 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26389 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26396 \begin_layout Description
26398 \begin_inset space ~
26401 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26403 LatexCommand nameref
26404 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26411 \begin_layout Standard
26412 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26413 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26415 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26419 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26423 \begin_layout Standard
26424 You can only use the style
26428 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26432 is always possible.
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26436 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26437 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26439 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26440 \begin_inset space ~
26444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26446 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26453 \begin_layout Standard
26454 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26458 \begin_inset space ~
26462 \begin_inset space ~
26467 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26468 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26471 \begin_inset space ~
26476 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26477 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26480 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26486 \begin_layout Standard
26487 You can change labels at any time.
26488 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26489 do not need to think about this.
26492 \begin_layout Standard
26493 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26495 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26499 \begin_layout Standard
26500 References are described in detail in the section
26501 \begin_inset space ~
26505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26515 \begin_inset space ~
26523 \begin_layout Section
26524 Table of Contents and other Listings
26525 \begin_inset Index idx
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26535 \begin_inset Index idx
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26554 \begin_layout Subsection
26556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26558 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26565 \begin_layout Standard
26566 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26569 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26571 \begin_inset space ~
26575 \begin_inset space ~
26581 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26583 If you click on it, the
26587 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26588 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26589 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26591 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26593 \begin_inset space ~
26598 that is described in section
26599 \begin_inset space ~
26603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26605 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26612 \begin_layout Standard
26613 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26614 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26616 \begin_inset space ~
26620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26622 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26626 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26628 \begin_inset space ~
26632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26634 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26638 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26640 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26643 \begin_layout Subsection
26644 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26647 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26654 \begin_layout Standard
26655 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26657 You can insert them via the
26659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26663 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26666 \begin_layout Section
26667 URLs and Hyperlinks
26668 \begin_inset Index idx
26671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 \begin_inset Index idx
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26690 \begin_layout Subsection
26692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26701 \begin_layout Standard
26702 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26710 \begin_layout Standard
26711 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26713 \begin_inset Flex URL
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26726 \begin_layout Standard
26727 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26733 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26746 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26755 \begin_layout Subsection
26757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26759 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26766 \begin_layout Standard
26767 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26772 or with the toolbar button
26779 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26788 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26789 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26790 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26792 name "LyX's homepage"
26793 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26797 , an Email address like this:
26798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26800 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26801 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26806 , or a link to a file.
26809 \begin_layout Standard
26810 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26823 to the link target.
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26828 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26829 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26830 the text style dialog.
26831 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26837 name "LyX's homepage"
26838 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26845 \begin_layout Standard
26846 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26850 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26857 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26859 \begin_inset Newline newline
26867 \begin_inset Newline newline
26874 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26877 \begin_layout Section
26879 \begin_inset Index idx
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26891 name "sec:Appendices"
26898 \begin_layout Standard
26899 Appendices are created with the menu
26901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26903 \begin_inset space ~
26907 \begin_inset space ~
26913 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26914 as the appendix part of the book.
26915 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26918 \begin_layout Standard
26919 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26920 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26921 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26922 and the subsection number.
26923 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26927 \begin_layout Standard
26929 \begin_inset space ~
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26935 reference "chap:Credits"
26940 \begin_inset space ~
26944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26946 reference "subsec:Export"
26953 \begin_layout Section
26955 \begin_inset Index idx
26958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26967 name "sec:Bibliography"
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26977 You can include a bibliography database,
26981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26982 Known under the name
26983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26986 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26996 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26997 manually, using the paragraph environment
27001 , which was described in section
27002 \begin_inset space ~
27006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27008 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27013 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27014 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27018 use a bibliography database.
27021 \begin_layout Subsection
27022 The Bibliography Environment
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27030 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27032 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27041 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27043 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27053 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27056 \begin_layout Standard
27057 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27062 or the toolbar button
27065 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27069 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27070 containing the available citations.
27071 Select one or more keys from the list and
27081 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27082 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27086 \begin_layout Standard
27087 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27088 entry with surrounding brackets.
27093 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27094 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27110 Companion Second Edition
27113 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27115 key "latexcompanion"
27122 \begin_layout Standard
27123 The \SpecialChar LyX
27124 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27134 \begin_layout Standard
27135 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27138 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27140 \begin_inset space ~
27148 arg "layout-paragraph"
27152 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27155 \begin_layout Subsection
27156 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27158 \begin_inset Index idx
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 Bibliography ! Databases
27168 \begin_inset Index idx
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27172 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27181 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27188 \begin_layout Standard
27189 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27197 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27198 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27203 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27205 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27206 your working field in a database.
27207 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27208 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27209 list for that document.
27210 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27214 \begin_layout Standard
27215 The database is a text file with the file extension
27216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27227 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27228 The format is explained in
27229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27235 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27239 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27244 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27245 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27246 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27248 \begin_inset Flex URL
27251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 To use a database, use the menu
27264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27269 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27271 \begin_inset space ~
27277 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27278 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27285 Add bibliography to TOC
27287 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27292 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27293 in the document or just the cited references.
27296 \begin_layout Standard
27297 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27309 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27310 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27311 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27312 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27314 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27321 \begin_inset Newline newline
27325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27327 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27343 \begin_layout Standard
27344 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27345 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27347 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27354 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27355 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27360 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27361 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27362 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27366 The following variants are possible:
27369 \begin_layout Description
27370 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27371 with other bibliography packages (e.
27372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27376 \begin_inset space \space{}
27383 ), only with the package
27387 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27391 \begin_layout Description
27392 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27393 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27394 with all bibliography packages, except
27399 \begin_layout Description
27400 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27405 , works with all bibliography packages
27408 \begin_layout Standard
27409 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27410 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27412 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27415 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27419 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27428 \begin_layout Standard
27429 When you select the option
27431 Sectioned bibliography
27435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27436 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27439 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27440 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27442 Customizing Bibliographies
27446 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27451 Additional Features
27456 \begin_layout Standard
27457 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27458 the two methods of creating them.
27459 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27460 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27461 We used the style file
27465 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27468 \begin_layout Subsection
27470 \begin_inset Index idx
27473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27474 Bibliography ! Citation format
27482 \begin_layout Standard
27483 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27484 For this feature you need to enable the option
27490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27494 \begin_inset Index idx
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 Document ! Settings
27508 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27509 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27510 style files as explained in
27511 the previous section.
27514 \begin_layout Standard
27515 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27516 the citation reference window.
27517 Here is an example where the text
27518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27522 \begin_inset space ~
27526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27529 appears after the reference:
27532 \begin_layout Standard
27534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27537 key "latexcompanion"
27544 \begin_layout Section
27546 \begin_inset Index idx
27549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27565 \begin_layout Standard
27566 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27570 \begin_inset space ~
27575 or the toolbar button
27582 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27583 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27584 by \SpecialChar LyX
27585 as the index entry.
27588 \begin_layout Standard
27589 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27592 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27594 \begin_inset space ~
27600 A light blue box labeled
27601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27612 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27613 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27617 \begin_layout Standard
27618 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27619 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27620 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27621 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27623 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27625 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27632 \begin_layout Subsection
27633 Grouping Index Entries
27634 \begin_inset Index idx
27637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27647 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27649 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27650 lists under the entry
27651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27659 First we create the entry
27660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27668 \begin_inset space ~
27672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27674 reference "subsec:Lists"
27679 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27680 \begin_inset space ~
27684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27686 reference "sec:Itemize"
27690 , we insert the command
27693 \begin_layout Standard
27699 \begin_layout Standard
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27710 for the enumerated list in section
27711 \begin_inset space ~
27715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27717 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27724 \begin_layout Standard
27725 The exclamation mark
27726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27733 marks the grouping levels.
27734 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27735 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27736 If we don't have an index entry for
27737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27744 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27747 \begin_layout Subsection
27749 \begin_inset Index idx
27752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 Index ! Page ranges
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27762 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27764 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27765 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27766 an index entry in section
27767 \begin_inset space ~
27771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27773 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27783 Paragraph environments|(
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 and another entry at the end of section
27788 \begin_inset space ~
27792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27794 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27801 \begin_layout Standard
27804 Paragraph environments|)
27807 \begin_layout Standard
27809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27832 respectively start and end the index range.
27833 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27834 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27835 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27836 An example is the index entry
27837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27840 Document ! Settings
27841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27847 \begin_layout Subsection
27849 \begin_inset Index idx
27852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 Index ! Cross referencing
27861 \begin_layout Standard
27862 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27863 We referred for example in the index entry
27864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27872 \begin_inset space ~
27876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27878 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27882 ) to the index entry
27883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27890 in the same section using the entry
27893 \begin_layout Standard
27896 GIF|see{Image formats}
27899 \begin_layout Standard
27900 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27902 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27903 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27906 \begin_layout Subsection
27908 \begin_inset Index idx
27911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 Index ! Entry order
27920 \begin_layout Standard
27921 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27922 follow the rules for the index order.
27923 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27929 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27931 \begin_inset space ~
27935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27937 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27946 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27947 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27972 \begin_inset Index idx
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 Dummy entries ! maïs
27982 \begin_inset Index idx
27985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 Dummy entries ! maître
27992 \begin_inset Index idx
27995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27996 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28001 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28002 maïs, maison, maître.
28003 To achieve this, we use the command
28006 \begin_layout Standard
28009 previous entry@current entry
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28013 In our case we want to have
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28029 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28040 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28042 See the next subsection for an example.
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28046 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28052 \begin_layout Standard
28053 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28058 to generate the index (see sec.
28059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28065 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28074 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28075 -package aeguill in sec.
28076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28082 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28086 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28087 -packages although all these index
28088 commands start with
28089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28102 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28107 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28110 \begin_layout Standard
28122 \begin_layout Standard
28134 \begin_layout Subsection
28136 \begin_inset Index idx
28139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28140 Index ! Entry layout
28148 \begin_layout Standard
28149 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28150 \begin_inset Index idx
28153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28156 This is an italic dummy entry
28161 You can also format the page number using the character
28162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28169 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28170 -command without a backslash.
28171 We can write for example
28174 \begin_layout Standard
28177 italic page number:|textit
28180 \begin_layout Standard
28181 to get the page number in italic.
28182 \begin_inset Index idx
28185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28186 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28191 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28192 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28210 \begin_inset space ~
28216 Have a look at section
28217 \begin_inset space ~
28221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28223 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28227 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28231 \begin_layout Standard
28232 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28240 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28244 to generate the index, see sec.
28245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28251 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28260 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28265 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28266 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28269 key "latexcompanion"
28281 \begin_layout Standard
28282 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28284 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28285 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28286 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28287 If so, put the following in the preamble
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28302 \begin_layout Standard
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28313 in the index entry.
28314 \begin_inset Index idx
28317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28318 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28323 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28324 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28325 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28328 \begin_layout Standard
28329 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28330 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28331 a bold font for all index entries.
28332 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28344 documentation for details,
28345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28347 key "makeindex,xindy"
28354 \begin_layout Subsection
28356 \begin_inset Index idx
28359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28368 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28375 \begin_layout Standard
28376 If the index generation program
28380 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28381 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28385 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28386 distribution, is used.
28390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28395 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28396 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28397 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28398 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28399 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28409 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28411 dialog, see section
28412 \begin_inset space ~
28416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28418 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28423 The available options are listed and explained in
28424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28426 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28431 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28435 \begin_layout Standard
28436 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28437 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28441 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28445 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28446 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28449 \begin_layout Subsection
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28454 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28455 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28463 next to the standard index.
28465 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28466 that add this feature.
28473 \begin_inset Index idx
28476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28478 -packages ! splitidx
28483 package to generate multiple indexes.
28484 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28490 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28492 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28499 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28500 style, but it also includes
28501 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28502 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28512 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28515 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28518 and select the option
28520 Use multiple Indexes
28527 already contains the standard index
28528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28536 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28537 also appear as a heading) to the
28541 input field and press the
28546 The new index now also appears in the list.
28547 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28548 label color to the new index.
28551 \begin_layout Standard
28552 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28562 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28563 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28564 are additional features:
28567 \begin_layout Itemize
28568 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28569 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28572 \begin_layout Itemize
28573 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28574 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28582 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28583 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28584 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28585 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28588 \begin_layout Section
28589 Nomenclature/Glossary
28590 \begin_inset Index idx
28593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28600 \begin_inset Index idx
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28634 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28641 \begin_layout Standard
28642 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28643 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28644 called nomenclature or glossary.
28647 \begin_layout Standard
28648 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28655 \begin_inset Index idx
28658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28660 -packages ! nomencl
28666 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28674 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28680 and then use the menu
28682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28688 \begin_inset space ~
28693 or the toolbar button
28696 arg "nomencl-insert"
28701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28712 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28715 \begin_layout Standard
28716 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28717 The first is the term or
28721 that you wish to define.
28726 of the term or symbol.
28729 \begin_layout Standard
28730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28738 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28739 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28747 \begin_layout Subsection
28748 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28749 \begin_inset Index idx
28752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28753 Nomenclature ! Layout
28761 \begin_layout Standard
28762 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28766 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28773 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28781 \begin_inset Newline newline
28789 \begin_inset Newline newline
28795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28802 character starts/ends the formula.
28803 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28804 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28816 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28826 \begin_layout Standard
28827 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28828 -syntax is given in section
28829 \begin_inset space ~
28833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28835 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28846 \begin_inset space ~
28851 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28853 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28858 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28865 in this document is:
28866 \begin_inset Newline newline
28871 dummy entry for the character
28876 \begin_inset Newline newline
28888 \begin_inset space ~
28898 font use the command
28927 \begin_layout Standard
28928 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28933 \begin_inset space \space{}
28937 \begin_inset Newline newline
28953 \begin_inset Newline newline
28956 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28957 This command will make the font of all symbols
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28972 \begin_layout Standard
28973 If the characters |
28974 \begin_inset space \space{}
28978 \begin_inset space \space{}
28982 \begin_inset space \space{}
28986 \begin_inset space \space{}
28990 \begin_inset space \space{}
28993 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28994 a quote character in front of them.
28995 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28996 LatexCommand nomenclature
28997 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28998 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29005 \begin_layout Subsection
29006 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29007 \begin_inset Index idx
29010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29011 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29019 \begin_layout Standard
29020 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29021 -code of the symbol
29023 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29025 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29028 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29029 LatexCommand nomenclature
29031 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29038 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29042 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29043 LatexCommand nomenclature
29046 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29051 They will be sorted by
29052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29078 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29081 will be sorted before the
29085 since the character
29086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29093 is considered in sorting.
29096 \begin_layout Standard
29097 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29100 \begin_inset space ~
29105 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29106 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29108 For the example given, you can insert
29112 in this field for the
29113 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29120 will be located before
29121 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29127 \begin_layout Standard
29128 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29142 \begin_layout Subsection
29143 Nomenclature Options
29144 \begin_inset Index idx
29147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29148 Nomenclature ! Options
29156 \begin_layout Standard
29161 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29162 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29165 \begin_layout Description
29166 refeq Appends the phrase
29167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29182 to every nomenclature entry, where
29188 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29191 \begin_layout Description
29192 refpage Appends the phrase
29193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29208 to every nomenclature entry, where
29214 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29217 \begin_layout Description
29218 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29221 \begin_layout Standard
29222 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29223 class options list in the
29225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29229 In this document the options
29236 \begin_layout Standard
29237 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29243 \begin_layout Standard
29244 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29245 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29250 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29253 \begin_layout Description
29263 \begin_layout Description
29266 nomrefpage Like the
29273 \begin_layout Description
29276 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29285 \begin_layout Description
29289 \begin_inset space ~
29295 \begin_inset space ~
29300 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29303 \begin_layout Standard
29305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29312 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29313 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29317 \begin_layout Standard
29325 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29328 \begin_inset Newline newline
29335 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29340 \begin_inset Newline newline
29344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29359 by their translation.
29362 \begin_layout Subsection
29363 Printing the Nomenclature
29364 \begin_inset Index idx
29367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29368 Nomenclature ! Printing
29376 \begin_layout Standard
29377 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29380 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29396 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29397 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29398 You can choose between these settings:
29401 \begin_layout Description
29402 Default a space of 1
29403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29409 \begin_layout Description
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29415 \begin_inset space ~
29418 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29421 \begin_layout Description
29422 Custom custom space
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29435 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29443 For example, in order to change the name to
29447 , add the following line to the preamble:
29450 \begin_layout Standard
29458 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29461 \begin_layout Subsection
29462 Nomenclature Program
29463 \begin_inset Index idx
29466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29467 Nomenclature ! Program
29473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29475 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29482 \begin_layout Standard
29488 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29489 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29491 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29496 by adding options, see section
29497 \begin_inset space ~
29501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29503 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29508 The available options are listed and explained in
29509 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29511 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29518 \begin_layout Section
29520 \begin_inset Index idx
29523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29530 \begin_inset Index idx
29533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29534 Document ! Branches
29540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29542 name "sec:Branches"
29549 \begin_layout Standard
29550 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29551 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29552 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29553 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29556 \begin_layout Standard
29557 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29558 allows you to put text into branches.
29559 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29560 To create a branch, either select the menu
29562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29563 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29566 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29575 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29576 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29577 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29578 and whether the name of the branch should
29579 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29580 (see below for an example).
29581 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29582 to the name of the other) and to add
29583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29595 \begin_inset space ~
29598 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29599 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29602 \begin_layout Standard
29603 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29604 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29609 where you can choose a branch.
29610 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29614 \begin_layout Standard
29615 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29616 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29620 \begin_inset Branch Question
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29624 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29632 \begin_layout Standard
29633 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29636 \begin_layout Standard
29637 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29645 \begin_layout Standard
29652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29653 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29656 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29657 Consider for example a file
29658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29665 which has the above branches.
29667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29674 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29698 branch were inactive,
29699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29714 branch was active, likewise
29715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29730 branch was active, and
29731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29734 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29738 if both branches were active.
29739 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29742 \begin_layout Standard
29743 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29750 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29751 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29752 definitions for each branch.
29753 For example you can define for the question branch
29757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29758 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29759 -syntax, see section
29760 \begin_inset space ~
29764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29766 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29798 \begin_layout Standard
29799 and for the answer branch
29802 \begin_layout Standard
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29822 \begin_layout Standard
29823 \begin_inset Branch Question
29826 \begin_layout Standard
29830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29858 \begin_layout Standard
29859 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29895 Now it is possible to use the
29899 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29906 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29909 commands to obtain conditional output.
29910 Here is an example formula where only the
29917 \begin_inset Formula
29919 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29928 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29936 \begin_layout Standard
29937 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29943 \begin_inset space \space{}
29946 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29948 For this advanced usage, see the
29953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29956 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29963 \begin_layout Section
29965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29967 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29972 \begin_inset Index idx
29975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29991 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29993 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29999 \begin_inset Index idx
30002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30004 -packages ! hyperref
30009 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30010 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30011 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30012 part of the document.
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30017 The header information in the dialog tab
30021 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30022 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30023 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30024 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30028 \begin_inset space ~
30032 \begin_inset space ~
30037 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30038 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30039 and author entries.
30043 \begin_inset space ~
30047 \begin_inset space ~
30051 \begin_inset space ~
30056 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30060 You can specify in the dialog tab
30064 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30069 \begin_inset space ~
30073 \begin_inset space ~
30077 \begin_inset space ~
30082 option allows long links to be split;
30085 \begin_inset space ~
30089 \begin_inset space ~
30093 \begin_inset space ~
30101 \begin_inset space ~
30106 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30109 \begin_inset space ~
30114 colors the different links.
30115 The default colors are:
30118 \begin_layout Labeling
30119 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30124 for hyperlinks and URLs
30127 \begin_layout Labeling
30128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30136 \begin_layout Labeling
30137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 but you can change these in the field
30151 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30154 \begin_layout Standard
30157 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30165 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30166 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30167 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30175 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30176 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30177 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30187 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30188 when opening the PDF.
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30193 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30194 \begin_inset space ~
30197 1 will only display the sections.
30200 \begin_layout Standard
30201 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30202 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30208 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30209 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30218 \begin_layout Section
30220 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30224 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30231 \begin_layout Subsection
30234 \begin_inset Index idx
30237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30247 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 As \SpecialChar LyX
30256 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30257 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30258 commands and constructs,
30261 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30262 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30263 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30264 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30265 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30266 cannot support all packages and
30270 \begin_layout Standard
30271 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30272 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30273 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30277 Code box is created by the menu
30279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30281 \begin_inset space ~
30286 or by the toolbar button
30299 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30307 \begin_layout Standard
30308 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30310 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30312 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30313 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30320 , you can write the command part
30326 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30327 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30331 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30332 Code box behind the word.
30333 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30334 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30339 \begin_inset Graphics
30340 filename clipart/ERT.png
30348 \begin_layout Standard
30352 \begin_layout Standard
30353 This is a line with a
30357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 \begin_layout Standard
30381 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30389 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30390 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30391 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30392 know that the command is finished.
30400 \begin_layout Subsection
30401 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30403 \begin_inset Argument 1
30406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30407 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30414 \begin_inset Index idx
30417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30427 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30435 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30436 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30437 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30438 uses in the background.
30439 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30440 is based on commands, you can
30441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30449 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30450 any time if you know the right commands.
30451 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30452 is the end of the day.
30453 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30454 all caption labels bold.
30455 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30457 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30464 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30466 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30469 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30479 As result you find that the package
30484 \begin_inset Index idx
30487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30489 -packages ! caption
30495 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30500 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30504 \begin_inset space ~
30512 \begin_layout Standard
30517 usepackage[options]{package name}
30520 \begin_layout Standard
30521 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30522 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30523 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30524 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30527 \begin_layout Standard
30528 In your case the package name is
30533 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30538 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30539 So you add the command
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30547 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30556 For more commands provided by the
30560 package, have a look at its documentation,
30561 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30578 For example if you use a
30582 class, you don't need the package
30586 , you can instead write
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30594 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30600 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30601 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30602 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30609 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30612 \begin_layout Standard
30613 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30614 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30616 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30617 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30618 Code box as described in the previous
30622 \begin_layout Standard
30623 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30624 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30629 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30636 \begin_layout Standard
30637 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30643 \begin_layout Standard
30647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 \begin_inset Note Note
30660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30661 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30669 \begin_layout Left Header
30670 \begin_inset Argument 1
30673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30693 \begin_inset Note Note
30696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30697 defines the header line as described below
30705 \begin_layout Center Header
30706 \begin_inset Argument 1
30709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30718 \begin_layout Right Header
30719 \begin_inset Argument 1
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30743 \begin_layout Left Footer
30744 \begin_inset Argument 1
30747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 \begin_layout Center Footer
30769 \begin_inset Argument 1
30772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 \begin_inset Newline newline
30788 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30794 \begin_layout Right Footer
30795 \begin_inset Argument 1
30798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30820 \begin_layout Section
30821 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30824 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30829 \begin_inset Index idx
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30833 Document ! Header/Footer line
30839 \begin_inset Index idx
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30873 \begin_inset space ~
30879 As a second step add in the menu
30881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30889 Custom Header/Footerlines
30890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30894 This module offers the following 6
30895 \begin_inset space ~
30901 \begin_layout Description
30903 \begin_inset space ~
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30911 \begin_inset space ~
30915 \begin_inset space ~
30919 \begin_inset space ~
30925 \begin_layout Description
30927 \begin_inset space ~
30931 \begin_inset space ~
30935 \begin_inset space ~
30939 \begin_inset space ~
30943 \begin_inset space ~
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30953 \begin_layout Standard
30954 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30955 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30957 \begin_inset space ~
30961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30963 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30967 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30970 \begin_layout Standard
30971 \begin_inset Float figure
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30980 \begin_inset Tabular
30981 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30982 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30983 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30985 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31034 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31049 The normal text on the page goes here.
31050 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31052 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31053 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31058 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31067 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31096 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31125 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31143 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31148 name "fig:Page-layout"
31152 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31165 \begin_layout Standard
31166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31174 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31178 \begin_inset space ~
31183 is set to “Default”.
31184 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31193 \begin_layout Subsection
31197 \begin_layout Standard
31198 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31199 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31200 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31201 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31203 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31204 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31207 \begin_layout Standard
31208 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31209 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31215 \begin_inset space ~
31223 \begin_layout Description
31226 thepage prints the current page number
31229 \begin_layout Description
31232 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31235 \begin_layout Description
31238 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31241 \begin_layout Description
31244 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31245 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31252 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31255 because it usually goes in a left header.
31258 \begin_layout Description
31261 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31262 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31264 It is normally used in the right header.
31267 \begin_layout Subsection
31268 Default header/footer
31271 \begin_layout Standard
31272 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31273 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31274 footer has the page number.
31275 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31276 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31277 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31280 \begin_inset space ~
31288 \begin_layout Subsection
31292 \begin_layout Standard
31293 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31294 Some pages are different.
31295 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31296 a new part or chapter in your book.
31297 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31298 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31299 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31303 Header and footer decoration line
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31307 By default, you get a 0.4
31308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31311 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31312 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31324 in the following way:
31327 \begin_layout Standard
31334 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31337 \begin_layout Standard
31338 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31347 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31354 \begin_layout Standard
31355 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31357 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31358 \begin_inset space ~
31362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31372 Several header/footer lines
31375 \begin_layout Standard
31376 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31377 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31378 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31380 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31396 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31398 \begin_inset space ~
31406 \begin_layout Standard
31413 headheight}{height}
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31417 where height is a size in standard units.
31418 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31419 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31420 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31421 logfile with the menu
31423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31434 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31439 \begin_inset Index idx
31442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31444 -packages ! fancyhdr
31450 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31451 for your header/footer.
31454 \begin_layout Subsection
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31460 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31461 This example consists of the following definition:
31464 \begin_layout Description
31466 \begin_inset space ~
31475 , empty optional argument
31478 \begin_layout Description
31480 \begin_inset space ~
31483 Header empty, empty optional argument
31486 \begin_layout Description
31488 \begin_inset space ~
31497 in the optional argument
31500 \begin_layout Description
31502 \begin_inset space ~
31511 in the optional argument
31514 \begin_layout Description
31516 \begin_inset space ~
31529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31533 \begin_inset Newline newline
31537 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31544 in the optional argument
31547 \begin_layout Description
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31558 , empty optional argument
31561 \begin_layout Description
31564 headrulewidth set to 2
31565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31571 \begin_layout Standard
31572 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31573 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31579 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31595 \begin_layout Standard
31599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31603 pagestyle{headings}
31609 \begin_inset Note Note
31612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31613 switches back to page style with the default headings
31621 \begin_layout Section
31622 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31625 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31630 \begin_inset Index idx
31633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31640 \begin_inset Index idx
31643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31652 \begin_layout Standard
31654 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31655 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31656 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31659 \begin_layout Subsection
31663 \begin_layout Standard
31664 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31670 \begin_inset Index idx
31673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31675 -packages ! preview-latex
31680 (on some systems named simply
31685 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31693 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31695 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31703 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31704 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31705 -package are automatically
31706 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31710 \begin_layout Subsection
31714 \begin_layout Standard
31715 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31716 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31718 activate the option
31721 \begin_inset space ~
31728 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31734 \begin_inset space ~
31738 \begin_inset space ~
31741 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31748 \begin_inset space ~
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31766 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31769 \begin_layout Standard
31770 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31775 \begin_inset space ~
31783 \begin_inset space ~
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31792 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31793 and when you finish
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31807 generated by activating the option
31810 \begin_inset space ~
31816 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31824 \begin_layout Subsection
31825 Selected document parts
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31829 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31830 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31831 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31832 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31834 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31840 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31841 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31842 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31853 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31865 is explained in section
31867 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31872 \begin_inset space ~
31882 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31883 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31884 the final rotated boxes,
31885 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31886 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31888 Here is the result:
31891 \begin_layout Standard
31892 \begin_inset Preview
31894 \begin_layout Standard
31899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31903 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31909 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31919 height_special "totalheight"
31924 backgroundcolor "none"
31927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31952 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31958 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31980 \begin_layout Standard
31981 Previewing works also for colors.
31982 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 is explained in section
32008 \begin_inset space ~
32021 \begin_layout Standard
32022 \begin_inset Preview
32024 \begin_layout Standard
32028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32047 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32052 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32071 \begin_layout Standard
32072 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 If \SpecialChar LyX
32080 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32081 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32082 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32083 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32084 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32085 the \SpecialChar TeX
32087 If \SpecialChar LyX
32088 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32089 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32091 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32092 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32093 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32096 \begin_layout Subsection
32101 \begin_layout Standard
32102 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32103 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32106 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32108 \begin_inset space ~
32113 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32115 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32117 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32118 's main window, then only this selection
32119 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32120 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32121 the source view window.
32126 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32127 ; but note that if you have
32128 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32130 not just the one which is open at the time.
32133 \begin_layout Section
32134 Advanced Find and Replace
32135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32137 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32142 \begin_inset Index idx
32145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32152 \begin_inset Index idx
32155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32164 \begin_layout Subsection
32168 \begin_layout Standard
32169 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32170 allows for searching of complex,
32171 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32173 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32174 The key-features are:
32177 \begin_layout Itemize
32178 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32179 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32180 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32184 \begin_layout Itemize
32185 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32186 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32187 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32188 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32191 \begin_layout Itemize
32192 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32193 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32194 outside of mathematics environments
32197 \begin_layout Itemize
32198 Search may be widened to a specific
32203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32207 \begin_inset space ~
32210 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32211 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32218 \begin_layout Itemize
32219 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32220 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32225 \begin_inset space ~
32228 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32231 \begin_layout Subsection
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32236 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32238 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32251 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32254 ) or the toolbar button
32257 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32263 Advanced Find and Replace
32268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32272 \begin_layout Standard
32278 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32282 \begin_inset space ~
32287 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32290 arg "paragraph-break"
32294 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32295 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32299 arg "paragraph-break"
32302 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32306 searches backwards.
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32313 \begin_inset space ~
32318 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32327 \begin_inset space ~
32332 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32336 Searching for mathematics
32339 \begin_layout Standard
32340 Mathematical formulas, such as
32341 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32344 or something more complex like
32345 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32348 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32353 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32354 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32355 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32356 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32366 \begin_layout Standard
32367 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32368 This is done by switching to the
32372 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32377 This way, entering in the
32384 \begin_layout Itemize
32385 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32386 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32389 \begin_layout Itemize
32390 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32391 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32394 \begin_layout Itemize
32395 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32396 of it only within section headings.
32397 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32398 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32402 \begin_layout Itemize
32403 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32404 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32411 \begin_layout Standard
32412 The entries made in the
32416 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32425 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32429 button or alternatively press
32432 arg "paragraph-break"
32439 while the cursor is in the
32442 \begin_inset space ~
32450 \begin_layout Standard
32451 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32453 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32457 \begin_layout Itemize
32458 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32459 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32467 with its typewriter version
32468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32482 \begin_layout Itemize
32483 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32489 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32501 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32508 (you may want to enable the
32511 \begin_inset space ~
32519 \begin_inset space ~
32524 options and disable the
32532 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32540 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32541 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32545 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32548 , or occurrences of
32549 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32553 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32559 \begin_layout Subsection
32563 \begin_layout Standard
32564 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32569 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32573 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32582 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32588 This is done with the context menu
32590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32591 Insert Regular Expression
32593 while the cursor is in the
32598 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32599 expression matching rules
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32604 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32611 \begin_inset space ~
32614 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32615 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32621 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32622 same text in the document.
32623 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32624 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32627 \begin_layout Enumerate
32628 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32633 editor the fraction
32634 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32638 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32641 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32642 fractions with the given denominator.
32645 \begin_layout Enumerate
32646 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32658 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32663 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32664 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32665 Also, by inserting a
32666 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32669 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32670 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32674 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32675 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32676 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32679 , and referring back to them through
32680 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32684 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32688 For example, try searching with the regexp
32689 \begin_inset Newline newline
32692 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32695 \begin_inset Newline newline
32698 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32701 \begin_layout Standard
32702 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32705 \begin_layout Standard
32706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32714 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32715 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32716 sub-expressions is absolute.
32718 \begin_inset space ~
32722 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32725 always refers to the first occurrence of
32726 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32729 in all entered regexps.
32737 \begin_layout Section
32739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32741 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32746 \begin_inset Index idx
32749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32758 \begin_layout Standard
32760 has a built-in spell checker.
32763 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32770 key or the toolbar button
32773 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32776 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32777 beginning of the currently selected text.
32778 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32779 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32780 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32781 scrolled so that it is visible.
32782 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32783 n, if any could be found.
32784 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32788 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32789 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32793 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32800 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32801 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32803 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32804 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32807 \begin_inset space ~
32815 arg "dialog-show character"
32818 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32820 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32824 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32825 can be downloaded from here:
32826 \begin_inset Newline newline
32830 \begin_inset Flex URL
32833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32835 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32841 \begin_inset Newline newline
32845 \begin_inset space ~
32848 files for each language.
32849 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32850 \begin_inset space ~
32853 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32854 's installation subfolder
32862 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32864 \begin_inset Newline newline
32867 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32868 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32869 but in most cases these are
32885 is the language code.
32888 \begin_layout Subsection
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32895 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32896 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32904 you can set the following things:
32907 \begin_layout Description
32909 \begin_inset space ~
32912 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32913 should use for spell checking.
32914 Depending on your platform,
32928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32929 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32930 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32945 \begin_inset space ~
32948 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32951 \begin_layout Description
32953 \begin_inset space ~
32956 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32957 will always use the given language
32958 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32961 \begin_layout Description
32963 \begin_inset space ~
32966 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32972 \begin_inset space \space{}
32976 This should normally not be needed.
32979 \begin_layout Description
32981 \begin_inset space ~
32985 \begin_inset space ~
32988 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33000 \begin_layout Description
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33005 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33006 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33007 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33008 appear in a context menu.
33009 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33013 \begin_layout Description
33015 \begin_inset space ~
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33023 \begin_inset space ~
33026 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33030 \begin_layout Section
33032 \begin_inset Index idx
33035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33044 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33051 \begin_layout Standard
33053 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33054 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33064 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33066 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33075 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33077 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33078 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33079 which are available for many languages.
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33084 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33088 \begin_layout Subsection
33089 Setting up the thesaurus
33092 \begin_layout Standard
33101 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33105 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33110 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33116 \begin_inset space ~
33124 For instance, the US English files are named:
33127 \begin_layout Itemize
33131 \begin_layout Itemize
33135 \begin_layout Standard
33144 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33145 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33148 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33149 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33150 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33152 \begin_inset space ~
33157 ) to the path where they are installed.
33161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33163 ies, typical locations are
33169 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33173 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33177 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33180 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33186 LibreOffice-<Version>
33193 On the Mac, the default location is
33195 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33196 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33197 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33198 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33199 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33200 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33208 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33209 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33210 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33214 \begin_layout Standard
33215 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33216 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33220 \begin_layout Itemize
33221 \begin_inset Flex URL
33224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33234 \begin_layout Standard
33235 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33236 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33238 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33239 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33240 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33242 \begin_inset space ~
33247 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33249 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33250 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33254 \begin_layout Standard
33255 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33257 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33260 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33266 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33269 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33270 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33279 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33280 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33282 \begin_inset space ~
33287 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33290 \begin_layout Subsection
33291 Using the thesaurus
33294 \begin_layout Standard
33295 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33297 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33300 or the toolbar button
33303 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33306 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33308 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33310 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33311 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33312 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33321 ), related terms (such as
33324 \begin_inset space ~
33333 ), compounds (such as
33336 \begin_inset space ~
33345 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33354 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33357 \begin_layout Standard
33358 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33359 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33363 \begin_layout Standard
33364 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33365 the dictionary, such as the above
33369 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33374 \begin_inset space \space{}
33377 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33378 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33379 For example, looking up the word form
33383 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33388 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33393 \begin_inset space \space{}
33404 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33405 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33406 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33409 \begin_layout Section
33411 \begin_inset Index idx
33414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 \begin_inset Index idx
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 Document ! Change Tracking
33431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33433 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33440 \begin_layout Standard
33441 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33442 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33443 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33444 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33448 \begin_inset space ~
33451 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33453 \begin_inset space ~
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33476 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33477 You can change the color in
33479 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33480 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33486 \begin_inset space ~
33491 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33497 \begin_inset Index idx
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33501 Color ! Change tracking
33506 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33507 's status bar when the
33508 cursor is in changed text.
33509 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33512 arg "changes-merge"
33518 \begin_layout Standard
33519 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33521 \begin_inset Index idx
33524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33534 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33540 \begin_layout Standard
33541 \begin_inset Graphics
33542 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33551 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33557 \begin_layout Standard
33558 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33569 \begin_inset Tabular
33570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33571 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33573 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33583 arg "changes-track"
33591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33599 \begin_inset space ~
33602 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33604 \begin_inset space ~
33613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 arg "changes-output"
33630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33638 \begin_inset space ~
33641 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33643 \begin_inset space ~
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33651 \begin_inset space ~
33660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33681 Jumps to the next change
33687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33696 arg "change-accept"
33704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33712 \begin_inset space ~
33715 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33717 \begin_inset space ~
33726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33735 arg "change-reject"
33743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33751 \begin_inset space ~
33754 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33756 \begin_inset space ~
33765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33774 arg "changes-merge"
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33790 \begin_inset space ~
33793 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33795 \begin_inset space ~
33804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33813 arg "all-changes-accept"
33821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33832 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33856 arg "all-changes-reject"
33864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33877 \begin_inset space ~
33881 \begin_inset space ~
33890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33914 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33948 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33950 \begin_inset space ~
33966 \begin_layout Standard
33967 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33995 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33996 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33997 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33998 the next change after the current cursor position.
33999 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34000 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34001 step to the next change.
34002 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34006 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34007 to describe a change.
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34011 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34017 \begin_inset Index idx
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34022 -packages ! dvipost
34028 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34036 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34040 \begin_layout Section
34041 Comparison of Documents
34042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34044 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34049 \begin_inset Index idx
34052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34053 Comparison of documents
34061 \begin_layout Standard
34062 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34069 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34070 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34072 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34074 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34078 \begin_inset space ~
34082 \begin_inset space ~
34086 \begin_inset space ~
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34115 \begin_inset space ~
34120 enables the change tracking option
34123 \begin_inset space ~
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34131 \begin_inset space ~
34136 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34139 \begin_layout Section
34140 International Support
34141 \begin_inset Index idx
34144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34145 International support
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34154 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34155 with any language you want.
34156 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34157 up \SpecialChar LyX
34159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34161 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34170 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34171 \begin_inset space ~
34175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34177 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34184 \begin_layout Subsection
34186 \begin_inset Index idx
34189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34196 \begin_inset Index idx
34199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 Document ! Settings
34206 \begin_inset Index idx
34209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34210 Document ! Language
34218 \begin_layout Standard
34221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34225 dialog lets you set
34227 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34237 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34247 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34248 For details about the different encoding options see section
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34255 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34262 \begin_layout Subsection
34263 Keyboard mapping configuration
34264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34266 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 If you have for example a U.
34275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34278 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34279 can use an alternate keymap.
34280 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34286 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34287 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34290 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34291 \begin_inset space ~
34295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34297 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34302 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34303 which one you want to use.
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34307 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34308 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34309 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34313 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34314 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34315 one to support the characters you want.
34316 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34323 \begin_layout Chapter
34326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34328 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34337 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34338 topic inside the user's guide.
34341 \begin_layout Section
34343 \begin_inset Index idx
34346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34355 \begin_layout Standard
34360 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34363 \begin_layout Subsection
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34368 Creates a new document.
34371 \begin_layout Subsection
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34376 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34377 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34378 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34381 \begin_layout Subsection
34385 \begin_layout Standard
34389 \begin_layout Subsection
34393 \begin_layout Standard
34394 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34395 Click there on a file to open it.
34398 \begin_layout Subsection
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34403 Closes the current document.
34406 \begin_layout Subsection
34410 \begin_layout Standard
34411 Closes all opened documents.
34414 \begin_layout Subsection
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34419 Saves the actual document.
34422 \begin_layout Subsection
34426 \begin_layout Standard
34427 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34430 \begin_layout Subsection
34434 \begin_layout Standard
34435 Saves all opened documents.
34438 \begin_layout Subsection
34442 \begin_layout Standard
34443 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34446 \begin_layout Subsection
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34452 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34453 It is described in the section
34455 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34460 Additional Features
34465 \begin_layout Subsection
34469 \begin_layout Standard
34470 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34471 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34473 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34474 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34478 \begin_layout Standard
34479 When using the menu entry
34482 \begin_inset space ~
34487 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34491 \begin_inset space ~
34495 \begin_inset space ~
34499 \begin_inset space ~
34504 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34505 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34508 \begin_layout Subsection
34510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34512 name "subsec:Export"
34519 \begin_layout Standard
34520 You can export your document to various file formats.
34521 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34523 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34524 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34525 during its configuration.
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34531 \begin_inset space ~
34535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34537 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34544 \begin_layout Description
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34553 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34558 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34559 \begin_inset Newline newline
34562 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34563 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34567 \begin_layout Description
34568 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34574 \begin_layout Description
34576 \begin_inset space ~
34579 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34585 \begin_layout Description
34586 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34587 's native DVI-format.
34588 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34589 files paths or file names in your document.
34591 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34598 \begin_layout Description
34599 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34600 in files paths or file names
34603 \begin_layout Description
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34612 ) DVI-format using the program
34614 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34617 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34621 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34629 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34637 \begin_layout Description
34639 \begin_inset space ~
34642 (cropped) the same as
34646 but with cropped page margins.
34649 \begin_layout Description
34651 \begin_inset space ~
34654 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34658 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34663 \begin_layout Description
34667 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34675 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34683 \begin_layout Description
34685 \begin_inset space ~
34689 \begin_inset space ~
34692 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34696 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34704 \begin_layout Description
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34717 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34718 source that is compilable with the program
34720 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34724 \begin_layout Description
34728 \begin_inset space ~
34733 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34734 source, additionally all images used in the document
34735 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34739 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34742 \begin_layout Description
34746 \begin_inset space ~
34751 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34752 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34753 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34761 \begin_layout Description
34765 \begin_inset space ~
34774 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34775 source that is compilable with the program
34781 \begin_layout Description
34783 \begin_inset space ~
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34794 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34795 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34801 \begin_layout Description
34803 \begin_inset space ~
34806 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34807 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34813 \begin_inset space \space{}
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34837 represent the version number)
34840 \begin_layout Description
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34849 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34850 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34851 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34855 \begin_layout Description
34856 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34857 's internal XHTML engine
34860 \begin_layout Description
34861 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34866 \begin_layout Description
34867 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34869 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34872 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34876 \begin_layout Description
34878 \begin_inset space ~
34881 (cropped) the same as
34884 \begin_inset space ~
34889 but with cropped page margins
34892 \begin_layout Description
34896 \begin_inset space ~
34901 PDF-format using the program
34905 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34908 \begin_layout Description
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34929 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34934 \begin_inset space \space{}
34937 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34941 \begin_layout Description
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34950 PDF-format using the program
34952 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34955 , produces PDF-files directly
34958 \begin_layout Description
34962 \begin_inset space ~
34967 PDF-format using the program
34971 , produces PDF-files directly
34974 \begin_layout Description
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34983 PDF-format using the program
34987 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34990 \begin_layout Description
34994 \begin_inset space ~
34999 PDF-format using the program
35004 , produces PDF-files directly
35007 \begin_layout Description
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35019 \begin_layout Description
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35032 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35033 and then exported as text using the program
35038 \begin_layout Description
35043 PostScript format using the program
35048 \begin_layout Description
35049 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35050 source and also code in the statistical programming
35064 it is possible to use
35068 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35072 \begin_layout Standard
35073 If one of the menu entries
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35089 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35091 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35099 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35104 \begin_inset Index idx
35107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35108 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35117 \begin_layout Subsection
35121 \begin_layout Standard
35122 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35123 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35132 reference "sec:Paths"
35137 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35146 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35147 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35148 's preferences as described in section
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35155 reference "subsec:Converters"
35162 \begin_layout Subsection
35163 New and Close Window
35166 \begin_layout Standard
35167 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35171 \begin_layout Subsection
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35176 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35179 \begin_layout Section
35181 \begin_inset Index idx
35184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35193 \begin_layout Subsection
35197 \begin_layout Standard
35198 Described in section
35199 \begin_inset space ~
35203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35205 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35212 \begin_layout Subsection
35213 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35216 \begin_layout Standard
35217 Described in section
35218 \begin_inset space ~
35222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35224 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35231 \begin_layout Subsection
35235 \begin_layout Standard
35236 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35237 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35240 \begin_layout Subsection
35244 \begin_layout Standard
35245 Selects the whole document.
35248 \begin_layout Subsection
35249 Find & Replace (Quick)
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35253 Described in section
35254 \begin_inset space ~
35258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35260 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35267 \begin_layout Subsection
35268 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35271 \begin_layout Standard
35272 Described in section
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35279 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35286 \begin_layout Subsection
35287 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35290 \begin_layout Standard
35291 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35295 \begin_layout Subsection
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 Described in section
35301 \begin_inset space ~
35305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35314 \begin_layout Subsection
35316 \begin_inset Index idx
35319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35320 Paragraph ! Settings
35328 \begin_layout Standard
35329 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35330 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35336 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35343 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35353 \begin_layout Subsection
35357 \begin_layout Standard
35358 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35359 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35360 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35367 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35368 The properties of tables are described in section
35369 \begin_inset space ~
35373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35375 reference "sec:Tables"
35379 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35380 \begin_inset space ~
35384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35386 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35393 \begin_layout Subsection
35394 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35397 \begin_layout Standard
35398 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35400 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35401 \begin_inset space ~
35405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35407 reference "sec:Nesting"
35412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35414 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35421 \begin_layout Subsection
35424 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35427 \begin_layout Standard
35428 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35429 nts of the same type.
35431 \begin_inset space ~
35435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35437 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35441 for an explanation.
35444 \begin_layout Section
35446 \begin_inset Index idx
35449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35458 \begin_layout Standard
35459 At the bottom of the
35463 menu the opened documents are listed.
35466 \begin_layout Subsection
35467 Open/Close all Insets
35470 \begin_layout Standard
35471 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35474 \begin_layout Subsection
35475 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35482 \begin_layout Standard
35483 Math macros are described in the
35490 \begin_layout Subsection
35494 \begin_layout Standard
35495 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35502 reference "sec:Navigating"
35507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35509 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35516 \begin_layout Subsection
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35521 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35523 \begin_inset space ~
35527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35529 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35536 \begin_layout Subsection
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 Opens a window showing console messages.
35542 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35547 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35548 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35549 is processing the document.
35552 \begin_layout Subsection
35554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35556 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35561 \begin_inset Index idx
35564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35573 \begin_layout Standard
35574 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35575 All toolbars and the
35578 \begin_inset space ~
35583 can be turned on and off.
35588 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35617 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35621 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35628 \begin_layout Standard
35633 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35637 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35638 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35639 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35640 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35641 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35644 \begin_layout Standard
35646 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35647 \begin_inset space ~
35651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35653 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35660 \begin_layout Subsection
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35668 \begin_inset space ~
35672 \begin_inset space ~
35676 \begin_inset space ~
35680 \begin_inset space ~
35684 \begin_inset space ~
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35693 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35694 's main window vertically while
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35705 \begin_inset space ~
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35713 \begin_inset space ~
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35722 will split it horizontally.
35723 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35724 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35725 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35726 three or more documents at the same time.
35727 To close a split view, use the menu
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35742 \begin_layout Subsection
35746 \begin_layout Standard
35747 Closes a split view.
35750 \begin_layout Subsection
35754 \begin_layout Standard
35755 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35756 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35757 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35758 's main window fullscreen.
35759 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35760 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35763 \begin_layout Section
35765 \begin_inset Index idx
35768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35777 \begin_layout Subsection
35781 \begin_layout Standard
35782 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35789 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35800 \begin_layout Subsection
35802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35804 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35811 \begin_layout Standard
35812 Here you can insert the following characters:
35815 \begin_layout Description
35820 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35823 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35824 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35825 -packages you have installed.
35826 You can get a complete display by checking
35829 \begin_inset space ~
35835 \begin_inset Newline newline
35839 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35847 Not all characters will be visible in the
35851 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35859 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35863 ) can display every character.
35871 \begin_layout Description
35872 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35876 \begin_layout Description
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35885 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35892 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35899 \begin_layout Description
35901 \begin_inset space ~
35904 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35914 \begin_layout Description
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35919 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35929 \begin_layout Description
35931 \begin_inset space ~
35934 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35938 \begin_layout Description
35940 \begin_inset space ~
35943 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35947 \begin_layout Description
35949 \begin_inset space ~
35952 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35958 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35964 \begin_layout Description
35966 \begin_inset space ~
35969 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35973 \begin_layout Description
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_inset Index idx
35982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35989 \begin_inset Index idx
35992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35993 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35998 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35999 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36001 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36007 \begin_inset Index idx
36010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36018 \begin_inset Newline newline
36021 More information about this feature can be found in the
36027 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36033 \begin_layout Subsection
36037 \begin_layout Standard
36038 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36041 \begin_layout Description
36042 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36043 \begin_inset script superscript
36045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36054 \begin_layout Description
36055 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36056 \begin_inset script subscript
36058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 \begin_layout Description
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36072 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36079 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36086 \begin_layout Description
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36091 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36098 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36105 \begin_layout Description
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36110 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36117 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36124 \begin_layout Description
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36129 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36135 \begin_inset space \space{}
36138 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36139 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36148 To insert a fraction use the command
36153 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36157 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36166 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36173 \begin_layout Description
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36178 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36185 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36192 \begin_layout Description
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36197 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36204 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36211 \begin_layout Description
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36216 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36223 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36230 \begin_layout Description
36231 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36238 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36245 \begin_layout Description
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36250 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36251 \begin_inset space ~
36255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36257 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36264 \begin_layout Description
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36269 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36276 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36283 \begin_layout Description
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36292 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36293 \begin_inset space ~
36297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36299 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36306 \begin_layout Description
36308 \begin_inset space ~
36311 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36312 as described in section
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36319 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36326 \begin_layout Description
36328 \begin_inset space ~
36331 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36332 \begin_inset space ~
36336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36338 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36345 \begin_layout Description
36347 \begin_inset space ~
36350 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36351 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36359 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36366 \begin_layout Description
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36372 \begin_inset space ~
36376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36378 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36385 \begin_layout Description
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36394 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36401 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36408 \begin_layout Subsection
36412 \begin_layout Standard
36413 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36438 are described in section
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36445 reference "sec:toc"
36454 is described in section
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36461 reference "sec:Index"
36469 is described in section
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36476 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36482 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36485 is described in section
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36492 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36499 \begin_layout Subsection
36503 \begin_layout Standard
36504 To insert floats, as described in section
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36511 reference "sec:Floats"
36515 and in detail the chapter
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_layout Subsection
36534 \begin_layout Standard
36535 To insert notes, described in section
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36542 reference "sec:Notes"
36549 \begin_layout Subsection
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36556 Branches are described in section
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36563 reference "sec:Branches"
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36576 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36578 An example is the document class
36579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36586 with three custom insets.
36589 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36593 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36599 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36602 \begin_layout Subsection
36604 \begin_inset Index idx
36607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36616 \begin_layout Standard
36617 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36619 For more information see chapter
36621 External Document Parts
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_layout Subsection
36632 \begin_inset Index idx
36635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36644 \begin_layout Standard
36645 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36646 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36653 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_layout Subsection
36665 \begin_layout Standard
36670 dialog as described in section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36677 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36684 \begin_layout Subsection
36688 \begin_layout Standard
36693 as described in section
36694 \begin_inset space ~
36698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36700 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36707 \begin_layout Subsection
36711 \begin_layout Standard
36716 as described in section
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36723 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36730 \begin_layout Subsection
36732 \begin_inset Index idx
36735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36742 \begin_inset Index idx
36745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36746 Longtables ! Caption
36754 \begin_layout Standard
36755 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36756 Floats are described in section
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36763 reference "sec:Floats"
36767 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36782 \begin_layout Subsection
36786 \begin_layout Standard
36787 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36794 reference "sec:Index"
36801 \begin_layout Subsection
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36813 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36820 \begin_layout Subsection
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36825 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36826 Tables are described in section
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36833 reference "sec:Tables"
36837 and in detail in the chapter
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_layout Subsection
36856 \begin_layout Standard
36862 Graphics are described in section
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36869 reference "sec:Graphics"
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 Inserts a URL as described in section
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36888 reference "subsec:URLs"
36895 \begin_layout Subsection
36899 \begin_layout Standard
36900 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36901 \begin_inset space ~
36905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36907 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36914 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36920 \begin_inset space ~
36924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36926 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36933 \begin_layout Subsection
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36945 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36957 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36958 title or caption of a float.
36959 Inserts a short title as described in section
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36966 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36978 \begin_layout Standard
36979 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36980 Code box as described in section
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36987 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36996 \begin_inset Index idx
36999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37009 Inserts a program listings box.
37010 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37012 Program Code Listings
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37025 \begin_layout Subsection
37029 \begin_layout Standard
37030 Inserts the actual date.
37031 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37035 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37051 \begin_layout Subsection
37055 \begin_layout Standard
37056 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37057 \begin_inset space ~
37061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37063 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37070 \begin_layout Section
37072 \begin_inset Index idx
37075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37089 of the current document.
37090 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37093 \begin_layout Subsection
37097 \begin_layout Standard
37098 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37099 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37100 to jump, for example, between section
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37105 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37109 2.5 and use the submenu
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37139 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37143 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37149 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37152 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37155 \begin_layout Standard
37156 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37165 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37173 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37176 \begin_layout Subsection
37177 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37180 \begin_layout Standard
37181 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37191 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37192 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37200 \begin_inset space ~
37208 \begin_layout Subsection
37212 \begin_layout Standard
37213 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37216 The \SpecialChar LyX
37217 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37219 \begin_inset space ~
37227 \begin_inset space ~
37232 manual for a detailed description.
37235 \begin_layout Section
37237 \begin_inset Index idx
37240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37249 \begin_layout Subsection
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 Change Tracking is described in section
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37261 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37268 \begin_layout Subsection
37276 \begin_layout Standard
37277 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37278 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37279 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37281 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37282 to the clipboard or update the view.
37283 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37287 \begin_layout Subsection
37288 Start Appendix Here
37291 \begin_layout Standard
37292 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37293 as described in section
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37300 reference "sec:Appendices"
37307 \begin_layout Subsection
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37315 \begin_layout Standard
37316 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37317 default output format for the document (menu
37319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37320 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37321 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37339 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37343 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37346 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37347 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37352 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37357 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37375 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37379 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37380 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37382 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37383 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37385 \begin_inset space ~
37388 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37393 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37403 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37408 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37409 when it is first configured.
37410 The default output format is
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37421 \begin_layout Subsection
37422 View (Other Formats)
37425 \begin_layout Standard
37426 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37427 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37428 actual document with an external program.
37429 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37430 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37431 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37433 All possible formats are listed in section
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37440 reference "subsec:Export"
37445 You should at least see the menu entry
37450 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37452 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37460 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37465 \begin_inset Index idx
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37469 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37478 \begin_layout Standard
37479 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37480 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37483 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37488 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37493 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37503 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37508 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37509 when it is first configured.
37512 \begin_layout Subsection
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_layout Standard
37521 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37522 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37525 \begin_layout Subsection
37526 Update (Other Formats)
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37530 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37531 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37534 \begin_layout Subsection
37535 View Master Document
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37539 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37555 \begin_inset space ~
37560 manual for more information on this topic).
37561 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37562 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37575 generates the output of the whole book, while
37579 will just output the chapter alone.
37582 \begin_layout Standard
37583 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37584 in the document settings (menu
37586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37606 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37610 ) or in the preferences (menu
37612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37613 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37618 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37623 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37641 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37648 \begin_layout Subsection
37649 Update Master Document
37652 \begin_layout Standard
37653 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37674 manual for more information on this topic).
37675 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37676 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37681 in the document settings (menu
37683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37685 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37703 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37707 ) or in the preferences (menu
37709 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37710 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37715 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37720 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37726 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_inset space ~
37736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37738 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37745 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37749 name "subsec:Compressed"
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 Un/compresses the current document.
37758 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37759 compression (see the
37761 Additional Features
37763 manual for details).
37766 \begin_layout Subsection
37770 \begin_layout Standard
37771 The document settings are described in appendix
37772 \begin_inset space ~
37776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37778 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37785 \begin_layout Section
37787 \begin_inset Index idx
37790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37799 \begin_layout Subsection
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 Spell checking is explained in section
37805 \begin_inset space ~
37809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37811 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37818 \begin_layout Subsection
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 The thesaurus is described in section
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37830 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37839 \begin_inset Index idx
37842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37849 \begin_inset Index idx
37852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37861 \begin_layout Standard
37862 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37863 the highlighted document part.
37866 \begin_layout Subsection
37872 \begin_inset Index idx
37875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 Generates with the help of the program
37888 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37891 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37892 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37893 This feature is not available on Windows.
37896 \begin_layout Subsection
37902 \begin_inset Index idx
37905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37916 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37926 to see the full filename paths.
37929 \begin_layout Subsection
37931 \begin_inset Index idx
37934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37943 \begin_layout Standard
37944 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37945 files as described in section
37946 \begin_inset space ~
37950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37952 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37959 \begin_layout Subsection
37961 \begin_inset Index idx
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37977 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37995 \begin_inset Index idx
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37999 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38008 \begin_layout Standard
38009 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38010 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38011 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38012 -packages and programs it needs; see
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38020 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38027 \begin_layout Subsection
38031 \begin_layout Standard
38036 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38043 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38050 \begin_layout Section
38052 \begin_inset Index idx
38055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38065 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38066 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38068 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38072 \begin_layout Standard
38076 \begin_inset space ~
38081 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38082 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38083 packages and classes found
38084 by \SpecialChar LyX
38086 \begin_inset space ~
38090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38092 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38108 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38113 \begin_layout Section
38115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38117 name "sec:Toolbars"
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38125 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38126 \begin_inset space ~
38130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38132 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38139 \begin_layout Standard
38140 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38141 This is described in the
38143 Additional Features
38148 \begin_layout Subsection
38150 \begin_inset Index idx
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38163 \begin_inset Graphics
38164 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38179 \begin_layout Standard
38180 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38197 \begin_inset Note Note
38200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38206 manual for more information.
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38215 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38221 \begin_layout Standard
38222 \begin_inset Tabular
38223 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38224 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38225 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38226 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38232 \begin_inset Graphics
38233 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 pull-down box for the environments
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38269 \begin_inset Tabular
38270 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38271 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38272 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38273 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38297 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 arg "dialog-show print"
38381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38387 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38447 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38637 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38680 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 Emphasize text, function of the
38710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38715 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38745 Set text to noun style, function of the
38747 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38752 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38770 arg "textstyle-apply"
38778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 Format text using the current settings in the
38784 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38789 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38822 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38842 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 arg "tabular-insert"
38878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38900 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38912 Toggle outline window on/off,
38914 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38982 \begin_layout Subsection
38984 \begin_inset Index idx
38987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 \begin_layout Standard
38997 \begin_inset Graphics
38998 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39006 \begin_layout Standard
39007 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39014 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39018 \begin_layout Standard
39019 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39025 \begin_layout Standard
39026 \begin_inset Tabular
39027 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39028 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39030 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 arg "layout Enumerate"
39075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 arg "layout Itemize"
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39148 arg "layout Description"
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39175 arg "depth-increment"
39183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39213 arg "depth-decrement"
39221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39229 \begin_inset space ~
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 arg "float-insert figure"
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39266 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39282 arg "float-insert table"
39290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39297 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39343 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39437 arg "nomencl-insert"
39445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 arg "footnote-insert"
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39485 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39492 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39550 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39570 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39679 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39710 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39712 \begin_inset space ~
39721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 arg "dialog-show character"
39738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39746 \begin_inset space ~
39749 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39765 arg "layout-paragraph"
39773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39779 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39781 \begin_inset space ~
39790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39799 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39827 \begin_layout Subsection
39828 View/Update Toolbar
39829 \begin_inset Index idx
39832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39833 Toolbar ! View / Update
39841 \begin_layout Standard
39842 \begin_inset Graphics
39843 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39850 \begin_layout Standard
39851 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39857 \begin_layout Standard
39858 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39862 \begin_layout Standard
39863 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39869 \begin_layout Standard
39870 \begin_inset Tabular
39871 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39872 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39873 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39874 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39914 arg "buffer-update"
39922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39944 arg "master-buffer-view"
39952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39969 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 arg "master-buffer-update"
39986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39994 \begin_inset space ~
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40016 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40033 Synchronize with Output
40039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40063 View (Other Formats)
40069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40076 arg "update-others"
40084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40091 Update (Other Formats)
40104 \begin_layout Standard
40105 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40109 \begin_layout Subsection
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40114 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40121 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40125 , the table toolbar
40126 \begin_inset Index idx
40129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40143 manual and the math macro toolbar
40144 \begin_inset Index idx
40147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40160 \begin_layout Chapter
40161 The Document Settings
40162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40164 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40169 \begin_inset Index idx
40172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40173 Document ! Settings
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40190 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40191 is called with the menu
40193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40197 You can save your document settings as default with the
40199 Save as Document Defaults
40201 button in any dialog.
40202 This will create a template named
40206 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40207 when you create a new document without
40211 \begin_layout Standard
40216 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40217 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40222 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40223 to find the one you are looking for.
40224 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40225 the submenus of the dialog.
40227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40231 \begin_inset space \space{}
40235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40242 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40243 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40244 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40247 \begin_layout Section
40251 \begin_layout Standard
40252 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40254 Document classes are described in section
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40261 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40269 \begin_layout Standard
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40278 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40283 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40284 as a layout for a document class.
40285 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40287 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40296 \begin_layout Standard
40297 Some classes use special class options by default.
40298 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40302 and you can decide to use them or not.
40303 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40304 recommended you leave them untouched.
40309 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40310 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40315 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40317 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40323 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40324 \begin_inset Newline newline
40329 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40332 \begin_inset Newline newline
40335 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40336 distribution, see section
40341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40343 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40360 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40361 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40362 in the background if the child document
40363 is opened without its master.
40364 This way child documents are always compilable.
40365 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40381 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40392 \begin_inset Index idx
40395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40397 -packages ! prettyref
40403 \begin_inset Index idx
40406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40408 -packages ! refstyle
40413 for cross-references, see section
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40420 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40427 \begin_layout Section
40431 \begin_layout Standard
40432 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40433 Please refer to the section
40436 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40449 manual for details.
40452 \begin_layout Section
40456 \begin_layout Standard
40457 Modules are explained in section
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40464 reference "subsec:Modules"
40471 \begin_layout Section
40475 \begin_layout Standard
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40483 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40490 \begin_layout Section
40494 \begin_layout Standard
40495 The document font settings are described in section
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40502 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40509 \begin_layout Section
40513 \begin_layout Standard
40514 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40531 and whether it should be a
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40539 can also be specified here.
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40544 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40545 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40547 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40550 \begin_layout Standard
40553 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40556 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40557 justifies the text on screen.
40558 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40562 \begin_layout Section
40566 \begin_layout Standard
40567 This dialog is described in sections
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40574 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40581 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40588 \begin_layout Section
40592 \begin_layout Standard
40593 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40600 reference "subsec:Margins"
40607 \begin_layout Section
40609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40611 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40616 \begin_inset Index idx
40619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40620 Language ! Encoding
40628 \begin_layout Standard
40629 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40630 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40631 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40633 is always encoded in utf8).
40634 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40635 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40636 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40637 -command is not known for
40638 a particular character).
40641 \begin_layout Standard
40642 If you use the option
40647 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40648 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40649 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40651 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40652 exactly one encoding.
40653 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40656 \begin_layout Standard
40658 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40659 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40660 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40661 installation supports Unicode), choose
40662 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40663 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40664 is quite incomplete, so
40665 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40670 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40671 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40672 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40673 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40674 -commands is not used, because all
40675 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40676 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40677 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40678 , two new alternative engines
40679 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40681 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40683 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40686 \begin_inset space ~
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40714 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40719 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40723 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40726 \begin_layout Standard
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40735 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40736 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40746 The possible settings are:
40749 \begin_layout Description
40750 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40752 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40753 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40763 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40770 \begin_layout Description
40771 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40772 format you will use.
40773 In many cases this will be
40778 \begin_inset Index idx
40781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40789 If the newer package
40794 \begin_inset Index idx
40797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 -packages ! polyglossia
40804 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40805 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40806 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40808 this package will be used instead of
40815 \begin_layout Description
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40828 would be more appropriate.
40831 \begin_layout Description
40832 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40833 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40837 (for German texts), type in
40840 \begin_inset Newline newline
40845 usepackage{ngerman}
40848 \begin_layout Description
40849 None will not use a language package.
40850 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40853 \begin_layout Standard
40854 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40857 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40874 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40880 \begin_inset Index idx
40883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40885 -packages ! inputenc
40891 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40892 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40893 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40897 \begin_layout Description
40898 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40900 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40901 commands, which may result in a big
40902 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40903 -commands are needed.
40906 \begin_layout Description
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40915 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40918 \begin_layout Description
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40927 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40930 \begin_layout Description
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40935 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40938 \begin_layout Description
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40948 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40960 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40964 \begin_layout Description
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_inset space ~
40973 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40974 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40990 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_layout Description
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41010 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41011 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41014 \begin_layout Description
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41023 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41024 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41025 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41026 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_layout Description
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41046 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41047 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41048 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41050 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_layout Description
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41070 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41073 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41082 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41085 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41094 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41097 \begin_layout Description
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41102 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41105 \begin_layout Description
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41110 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41113 \begin_layout Description
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41122 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41125 \begin_layout Description
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41131 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41146 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41149 \begin_layout Description
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41161 \begin_layout Description
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41170 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41176 \begin_inset Index idx
41179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 , when using this, set the document language to
41191 \begin_layout Description
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41200 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41205 , when using this, set the document language to
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41214 \begin_layout Description
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41223 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41229 \begin_inset Index idx
41232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41234 -packages ! japanese
41239 , when using this, set the document language to
41244 \begin_layout Description
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41253 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41258 , when using this, set the document language to
41263 \begin_layout Description
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41277 , when using this, set the document language to
41282 \begin_layout Description
41284 \begin_inset space ~
41287 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41290 \begin_layout Description
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41303 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41306 \begin_layout Description
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41319 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41320 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41321 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41324 \begin_layout Description
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_inset space ~
41336 \begin_layout Description
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41345 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41346 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41349 \begin_layout Description
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41358 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41364 \begin_inset Index idx
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41374 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41377 \begin_layout Description
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41390 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41397 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41400 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41407 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41408 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41410 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41413 \begin_layout Description
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41422 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41428 \begin_inset Index idx
41431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41441 \begin_layout Description
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41446 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41452 \begin_inset Index idx
41455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41457 -packages ! inputenc
41463 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41467 \begin_layout Description
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41480 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41487 \begin_layout Description
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41500 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41501 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41502 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41506 \begin_layout Description
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41512 \begin_inset space ~
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41519 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41520 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41523 \begin_layout Section
41525 \begin_inset Index idx
41528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41535 \begin_inset Index idx
41538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41545 \begin_inset Index idx
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41549 Color ! Shaded boxes
41555 \begin_inset Index idx
41558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41559 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41567 \begin_layout Standard
41568 Here you can alter the font color for the
41572 (default: black), for
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41580 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41584 (default: white) and for
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41597 sets the color back to the default.
41600 \begin_layout Standard
41601 Clicking any button showing
41609 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41610 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41611 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41612 later more quickly.
41615 \begin_layout Standard
41616 Note, if you change the
41619 \begin_inset space ~
41624 font color and use the option
41627 \begin_inset space ~
41632 in the document settings under
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41640 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41647 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41654 \begin_layout Standard
41655 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41661 \begin_layout Standard
41665 \begin_inset space ~
41674 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41677 \begin_inset space ~
41680 Code after a forced page break:
41683 \begin_layout Itemize
41684 For the page color:
41685 \begin_inset Newline newline
41692 pagecolor{color name}
41695 \begin_layout Itemize
41696 For the text color:
41697 \begin_inset Newline newline
41707 \begin_layout Standard
41708 You are restricted to one of
41744 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41757 \begin_inset Newline newline
41760 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41761 names to refer to them:
41764 \begin_layout Itemize
41770 \begin_inset Newline newline
41775 page_backgroundcolor
41778 \begin_layout Itemize
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41788 \begin_inset Newline newline
41796 \begin_layout Itemize
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset Newline newline
41814 \begin_layout Itemize
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41824 \begin_inset Newline newline
41832 \begin_layout Standard
41833 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_layout Section
41856 \begin_layout Standard
41857 Here you can adjust the
41861 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41865 as described in section
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41872 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41879 \begin_layout Section
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41890 \begin_inset Index idx
41893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41905 \begin_inset Index idx
41908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41910 -packages ! jurabib
41918 Sectioned bibliography
41920 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41926 \begin_inset Index idx
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 -packages ! bibtopic
41936 and you can select a
41940 for the generation of the bibliography.
41941 For a further description see section
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41948 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41955 \begin_layout Section
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 Here you can define the
41964 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41966 \begin_inset space ~
41970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41972 reference "sec:Index"
41979 \begin_layout Section
41983 \begin_layout Standard
41984 The PDF properties are explained in section
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41991 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41998 \begin_layout Section
42002 \begin_layout Standard
42003 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42004 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42010 \begin_inset Index idx
42013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42015 -packages ! amsmath
42025 \begin_inset Index idx
42028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42030 -packages ! amssymb
42040 \begin_inset Index idx
42043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42055 \begin_inset Index idx
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42070 \begin_inset Index idx
42073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 -packages ! mathdots
42085 \begin_inset Index idx
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 -packages ! mathtools
42100 \begin_inset Index idx
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42115 \begin_inset Index idx
42118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 -packages ! stackrel
42130 \begin_inset Index idx
42133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42135 -packages ! stmaryrd
42145 \begin_inset Index idx
42148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42150 -packages ! undertilde
42155 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42158 \begin_layout Description
42159 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42160 -errors in formulas,
42161 ensure that you have this enabled.
42164 \begin_layout Description
42165 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42166 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42167 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42171 \begin_layout Description
42172 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42187 \begin_layout Description
42188 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42191 \begin_inset space ~
42203 \begin_layout Description
42204 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42215 \begin_layout Description
42216 mathtools is used for the math commands
42252 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42259 \begin_layout Description
42260 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42262 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42271 \begin_layout Description
42272 stackrel is used for the math command
42289 \begin_layout Description
42290 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42293 \begin_layout Description
42294 undertilde is used for the math command
42302 Accents for one Character
42311 \begin_layout Section
42315 \begin_layout Standard
42316 The float placement options are described in the section
42319 \begin_inset space ~
42327 \begin_inset space ~
42335 \begin_layout Section
42339 \begin_layout Standard
42340 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42342 Program Code Listings
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42355 \begin_layout Section
42359 \begin_layout Standard
42360 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42368 set to be used and set the
42373 The itemize environment is described in section
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42380 reference "sec:Itemize"
42387 \begin_layout Standard
42388 You can furthermore specify a
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42396 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42397 command of the desired character.
42398 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42405 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42411 \begin_inset space \space{}
42415 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42425 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42426 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42429 \begin_layout Standard
42430 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42438 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42439 -packages in the preamble (menu
42442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42443 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42452 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42456 usepackage{textcomp}
42459 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42463 usepackage{amssymb}
42473 \begin_layout Section
42477 \begin_layout Standard
42478 Branches are described in section
42479 \begin_inset space ~
42483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42485 reference "sec:Branches"
42492 \begin_layout Section
42494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42496 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42503 \begin_layout Standard
42504 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42507 \begin_layout Description
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42516 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42536 View Master Document
42537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42544 Update Master Document
42545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42552 menu or the toolbar.
42553 The default is set in
42555 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42556 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42561 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42565 \begin_inset space ~
42569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42571 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42578 \begin_layout Description
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42587 Output settings for the menu
42589 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42597 For a detailed description see section
42599 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42612 \begin_layout Description
42614 \begin_inset space ~
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42621 Options offers settings for the export format
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42634 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42635 \begin_inset space ~
42638 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42642 \begin_inset space ~
42647 settings are described in detail in section
42649 Math Output in XHTML
42654 \begin_inset space ~
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42667 \begin_inset space ~
42672 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42675 \begin_layout Section
42683 \begin_layout Standard
42684 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42686 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42688 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42690 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42694 \begin_layout Standard
42695 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42696 -syntax is given in section
42697 \begin_inset space ~
42701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42703 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42710 \begin_layout Chapter
42716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42718 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42723 \begin_inset Index idx
42726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42736 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42738 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42742 It has the following submenus.
42745 \begin_layout Section
42749 \begin_layout Subsection
42753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42754 User Interface File
42755 \begin_inset Index idx
42758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42759 Customization ! of toolbars
42765 \begin_inset Index idx
42768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 Customization ! of menus
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42778 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42779 interface (ui) file.
42780 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42788 \begin_layout Description
42793 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42796 \begin_layout Description
42803 the menu entries in popup context menus
42806 \begin_layout Description
42811 specifies the toolbar buttons
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42816 and edit the entries.
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42832 entries must be finished with an explicit
42857 and in the case of the
42858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42870 The syntax for the entries is:
42873 \begin_layout Standard
42874 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42905 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42908 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42909 -functions are listed in the menu
42911 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42913 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42922 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 For example, assuming you use the menu
42931 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42934 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42938 \begin_layout Standard
42939 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42963 \begin_layout Standard
42965 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42980 to have the sixth bookmark.
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42987 \begin_inset space ~
42992 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42993 's toolbar buttons.
42994 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42998 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43012 Enable tool tips in main work area
43014 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43022 \begin_layout Standard
43027 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43028 should display in the menu
43030 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43040 \begin_layout Subsection
43044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43051 Restore window layouts and geometries
43054 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43055 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43059 \begin_layout Standard
43062 Restore cursor positions
43064 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43071 Load opened files from last session
43073 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43080 Clear all session information
43082 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43083 sessions (cursor positions, names
43084 of last opened documents, etc.).
43087 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43091 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43096 \begin_inset Index idx
43099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43108 \begin_layout Standard
43111 Backup original documents when saving
43113 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43114 it was saved the last time.
43115 It is stored in the
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43130 reference "sec:Paths"
43134 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43137 \begin_inset space ~
43143 The backup file has the file extension
43144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43158 \begin_layout Standard
43161 Backup documents, every
43163 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43169 Save documents compressed by default
43171 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43172 \begin_inset space ~
43176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43178 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43183 This applies to newly created documents only.
43184 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43188 Windows & work area
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43194 Open documents in tabs
43196 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43200 \begin_layout Standard
43205 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43218 reference "sec:Paths"
43222 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43229 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43230 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43231 of \SpecialChar LyX
43233 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43234 instance is created for each file.
43237 \begin_layout Standard
43240 Single close-tab button
43242 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43252 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43253 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43256 \begin_layout Standard
43257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43265 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43266 before the change takes effect.
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43279 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43281 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43283 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43287 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43288 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43289 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43292 \begin_layout Subsection
43294 \begin_inset Index idx
43297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43306 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43313 \begin_layout Standard
43314 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43318 \begin_layout Standard
43319 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 This section only deals with the fonts
43331 the \SpecialChar LyX
43333 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43337 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43349 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43366 (depends on the system) as its
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43385 \begin_layout Standard
43386 You can change the font size with the
43393 \begin_layout Standard
43398 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43403 points have the size of 1
43404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43414 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43419 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43424 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43431 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43438 \begin_layout Standard
43441 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43443 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43444 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43445 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43446 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43447 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43449 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_layout Subsection
43458 \begin_inset Index idx
43461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43469 \begin_inset Index idx
43472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43483 by choosing an item in the
43484 list and selecting the
43491 \begin_layout Standard
43492 By checking the option
43496 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43499 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43500 \begin_inset space ~
43504 \begin_inset space ~
43509 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43512 \begin_layout Subsection
43514 \begin_inset Index idx
43517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43526 \begin_layout Standard
43527 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43531 \begin_layout Standard
43536 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43537 This feature is described in section
43538 \begin_inset space ~
43542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43544 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43551 \begin_layout Standard
43552 Checking the option
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43559 \begin_inset space ~
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43568 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43571 \begin_layout Section
43573 \begin_inset Index idx
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43585 \begin_layout Subsection
43589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43593 \begin_layout Standard
43596 Cursor follows scrollbar
43598 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43602 \begin_layout Standard
43603 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43604 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43605 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43608 \begin_layout Standard
43611 Scroll below end of document
43613 is self-explanatory.
43616 \begin_layout Standard
43617 In \SpecialChar LyX
43618 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43625 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43627 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43628 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43631 \begin_layout Standard
43634 Sort environments alphabetically
43636 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43639 \begin_layout Standard
43642 Group environments by their category
43644 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43647 \begin_layout Standard
43652 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43667 \begin_layout Standard
43668 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43673 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43674 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43678 \begin_layout Subsection
43680 \begin_inset Index idx
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43690 \begin_inset Index idx
43693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43694 Settings ! Shortcuts
43702 \begin_layout Standard
43707 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43709 Several binding files are available, among them:
43712 \begin_layout Description
43713 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43716 \begin_layout Description
43717 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43729 \begin_layout Description
43730 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43741 \begin_layout Standard
43742 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43747 , and binding files for special languages.
43748 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43753 \begin_inset space \space{}
43757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43765 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43766 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43767 will try to use the appropriate binding
43771 \begin_layout Standard
43772 Some binding files, like
43776 , only have a limited scope.
43777 When looking at the end of the file
43781 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43784 \begin_layout Standard
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43792 \begin_inset space ~
43797 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43798 in the selected key binding file.
43801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43805 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43810 \begin_inset Index idx
43813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43814 Key Bindings ! Editing
43822 \begin_layout Standard
43823 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43824 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43825 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43826 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43829 Show key-bindings containing
43832 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43833 Insert there for example as keyword
43834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43841 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43842 functions that contain
43843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43851 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43852 All \SpecialChar LyX
43853 functions are also listed in the file
43858 that you will find in the
43865 \begin_layout Standard
43866 For example, to add the shortcut
43874 , select the function and press the
43879 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43880 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43883 \begin_layout Standard
43884 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43885 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43887 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43888 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43890 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43896 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43899 \begin_layout Standard
43900 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43902 The syntax of the entries is:
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43930 \begin_layout Subsection
43932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43934 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43939 \begin_inset Index idx
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43949 \begin_inset Index idx
43952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43963 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43964 provides keyboard maps.
43965 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43966 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43978 and select the keyboard map file named
43985 \begin_layout Standard
43994 keyboard map and, if you use the
43998 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44001 arg "keymap-primary"
44007 arg "keymap-secondary"
44010 respectively or toggle between them with
44013 arg "keymap-toggle"
44019 \begin_layout Standard
44020 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44037 \begin_layout Standard
44038 You can also specify the mouse
44040 Wheel scrolling speed
44043 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44047 \begin_layout Standard
44055 \begin_inset space ~
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44064 you can select a key for zooming.
44065 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44068 \begin_layout Subsection
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 Input completion is described in section
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44080 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44087 \begin_layout Section
44089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44096 \begin_inset Index idx
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44106 \begin_inset Index idx
44109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 \begin_layout Standard
44119 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44120 are normally determined during
44122 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44125 \begin_layout Description
44127 \begin_inset space ~
44130 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44131 's working directory.
44132 It is the default when you
44143 \begin_inset space ~
44151 \begin_layout Description
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44156 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44158 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44172 \begin_layout Description
44174 \begin_inset space ~
44177 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44183 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44187 \begin_inset Newline newline
44191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44203 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44204 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44212 \begin_layout Description
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44218 \begin_inset Index idx
44221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44227 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44228 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44235 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44243 will be used to save the backups.
44244 \begin_inset Newline newline
44247 Backup files have the ending
44248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44258 \begin_layout Description
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44263 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44264 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44266 \begin_inset Newline newline
44273 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44279 You can edit this file with the program
44288 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44289 in its preferences under
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44298 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44303 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44305 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44306 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44312 and \SpecialChar LyX
44313 need to be running the same time.
44314 \begin_inset Newline newline
44317 The pipe is also used for the
44322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44328 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44333 \begin_inset Newline newline
44336 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44337 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44338 \begin_inset Newline newline
44354 \begin_layout Description
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44359 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44362 \begin_layout Description
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44367 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44368 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44369 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44372 \begin_layout Description
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44377 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44383 You only need to specify it if you are using
44387 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44389 For \SpecialChar LyX
44394 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44398 \begin_layout Description
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44403 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44404 When \SpecialChar LyX
44405 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44406 to find it on the system.
44407 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44409 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44418 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44419 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44422 \begin_layout Description
44424 \begin_inset space ~
44427 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44428 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44429 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44430 code or in the document
44432 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44434 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44435 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44436 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44437 scanned for the input files.
44438 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44439 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44441 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44442 compilation may fail for some documents.
44445 \begin_layout Section
44449 \begin_layout Standard
44450 Here you can insert your
44459 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44461 \begin_inset space ~
44465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44467 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44471 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44474 \begin_layout Section
44476 \begin_inset Index idx
44479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44480 Language ! Settings
44486 \begin_inset Index idx
44489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44490 Settings ! Language
44498 \begin_layout Subsection
44500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44502 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44509 \begin_layout Description
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44518 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44520 You can find its actual translation status here:
44521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44523 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44530 \begin_layout Description
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44535 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44536 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44537 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44538 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44555 The most widespread language package is
44560 \begin_inset Index idx
44563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44570 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44572 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44573 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44574 come with the alternative
44580 \begin_inset Index idx
44583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44585 -packages ! polyglossia
44590 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44591 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44597 The available selections are described in section
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44604 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44611 \begin_layout Description
44613 \begin_inset space ~
44616 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44617 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44618 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44619 An example is the start command
44625 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44627 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44646 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44651 \begin_layout Description
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44661 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44662 command toggles the package on and off.
44665 \begin_layout Description
44667 \begin_inset space ~
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44674 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44678 \begin_layout Description
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44687 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44691 \begin_layout Description
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44700 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44701 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44702 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44704 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44711 \begin_layout Description
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44716 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44718 When this option is not set, the
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44726 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44728 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44731 \begin_inset space ~
44739 \begin_layout Description
44741 \begin_inset space ~
44747 \begin_inset space ~
44753 When it is not set, the
44756 \begin_inset space ~
44761 is set to the end of the document.
44764 \begin_layout Description
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44773 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44774 language will be underlined in blue.
44777 \begin_layout Description
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44786 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44787 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44790 \begin_layout Description
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44795 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44796 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44797 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44798 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44801 \begin_layout Subsection
44805 \begin_layout Standard
44806 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44807 \begin_inset space ~
44811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44813 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44820 \begin_layout Section
44824 \begin_layout Subsection
44828 \begin_layout Description
44830 \begin_inset space ~
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44837 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44840 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44841 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44843 \begin_inset space ~
44849 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44852 \begin_layout Description
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44858 \begin_inset Index idx
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44868 \begin_inset Index idx
44871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44872 Settings ! Date format
44877 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44878 \begin_inset Newline newline
44882 \begin_inset Flex URL
44885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44893 \begin_inset Newline newline
44896 For example the format
44897 \begin_inset Newline newline
44901 \begin_inset Newline newline
44904 prints the date as day/month/year.
44907 \begin_layout Description
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_inset space ~
44916 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44917 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44920 \begin_layout Description
44922 \begin_inset space ~
44925 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44927 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44935 For a detailed description see section
44937 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44942 \begin_inset space ~
44950 \begin_layout Subsection
44956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44958 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44963 \begin_inset Index idx
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44967 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44976 \begin_layout Description
44978 \begin_inset space ~
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44993 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44998 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45019 are used for Cyrillic.
45020 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45033 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45035 sets up in the background.
45036 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45039 \begin_layout Description
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45048 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45053 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45057 \begin_layout Description
45059 \begin_inset space ~
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45074 options They only have an effect when the program
45078 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45081 \begin_layout Standard
45082 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45083 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45084 manuals of the applications.
45087 \begin_layout Description
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45092 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45093 \begin_inset space ~
45097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45099 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45106 \begin_layout Description
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45111 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45118 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45125 \begin_layout Description
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45130 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45137 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45144 \begin_layout Description
45150 \begin_inset space ~
45153 command Command for the program
45155 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45158 that is described in the section
45160 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45165 Additional Features
45170 \begin_layout Standard
45171 There are additionally the following options:
45174 \begin_layout Description
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45214 to separate folders.
45215 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45217 \begin_inset Index idx
45220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45227 \begin_inset Index idx
45230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45239 \begin_layout Description
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_inset space ~
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45264 changes Removes all manually set
45270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45273 \begin_inset space ~
45278 dialog when changing the document class.
45281 \begin_layout Section
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45287 \begin_inset Index idx
45290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45299 \begin_layout Subsection
45301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45303 name "subsec:Converters"
45308 \begin_inset Index idx
45311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45320 \begin_layout Standard
45321 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45322 from one format to another.
45323 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45324 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45336 field and press the
45341 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45350 drop-down list, modify the
45354 field and press the
45361 \begin_layout Standard
45364 Converter File Cache
45370 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45372 Maximum Age (in days
45375 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45376 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45379 \begin_layout Standard
45380 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45381 definition, is described in the section
45392 \begin_layout Subsection
45394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45396 name "sec:File-Formats"
45401 \begin_inset Index idx
45404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45411 \begin_inset Index idx
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45423 \begin_layout Standard
45424 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45434 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45437 \begin_layout Standard
45438 You can also define the
45440 Default output format
45442 that is used when you use
45444 View, Update, View Master Document
45448 Update Master Document
45454 menu or the toolbar.
45457 \begin_layout Standard
45458 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45469 \begin_layout Standard
45470 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45472 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45473 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45474 This is done by specifying a
45479 More about this is described in the section
45490 \begin_layout Chapter
45491 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45493 \begin_inset Index idx
45496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45505 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45514 \begin_inset space ~
45518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45520 reference "tab:Units"
45524 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45525 and used in this documentation.
45528 \begin_layout Standard
45529 \begin_inset Float table
45535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45536 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45554 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 \begin_inset Tabular
45563 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45564 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45773 scaled point (65536
45774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45852 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45925 % of original image width
45930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46241 \begin_layout Chapter
46243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46245 name "chap:Credits"
46252 \begin_layout Standard
46253 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46254 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46257 \begin_layout Itemize
46260 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46263 \begin_layout Itemize
46269 \begin_layout Itemize
46275 \begin_layout Itemize
46281 \begin_layout Itemize
46287 \begin_layout Itemize
46293 \begin_layout Itemize
46299 \begin_layout Itemize
46305 \begin_layout Itemize
46308 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46311 \begin_layout Itemize
46317 \begin_layout Itemize
46323 \begin_layout Itemize
46329 \begin_layout Itemize
46335 \begin_layout Itemize
46341 \begin_layout Itemize
46347 \begin_layout Itemize
46353 \begin_layout Itemize
46359 \begin_layout Itemize
46360 The \SpecialChar LyX
46362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46371 \begin_layout Standard
46372 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46375 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46382 \begin_layout Bibliography
46383 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46384 LatexCommand bibitem
46390 The \SpecialChar LyX
46392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46395 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46400 \begin_inset Newline newline
46404 \begin_inset Flex URL
46407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46417 \begin_layout Bibliography
46418 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46419 LatexCommand bibitem
46420 key "latexcompanion"
46424 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46426 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46427 Companion Second Edition.
46430 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46433 \begin_layout Bibliography
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46435 LatexCommand bibitem
46440 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46443 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46447 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46450 \begin_layout Bibliography
46451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46452 LatexCommand bibitem
46460 : A Document Preparation System.
46463 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46466 \begin_layout Bibliography
46467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46468 LatexCommand bibitem
46477 The \SpecialChar TeX
46481 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46484 \begin_layout Bibliography
46485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46486 LatexCommand bibitem
46491 The \SpecialChar TeX
46493 \begin_inset Newline newline
46497 \begin_inset Flex URL
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46502 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46510 \begin_layout Bibliography
46511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46512 LatexCommand bibitem
46517 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46519 \begin_inset Newline newline
46523 \begin_inset Flex URL
46526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46528 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46536 \begin_layout Bibliography
46537 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46538 LatexCommand bibitem
46544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46546 name "Documentation"
46547 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46553 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46557 \begin_inset Newline newline
46561 \begin_inset Flex URL
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46566 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46574 \begin_layout Bibliography
46575 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46576 LatexCommand bibitem
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46584 name "Documentation"
46585 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46589 how to use the program
46591 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46595 \begin_inset Newline newline
46599 \begin_inset Flex URL
46602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46604 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46612 \begin_layout Bibliography
46613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46614 LatexCommand bibitem
46620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46622 name "Documentation"
46623 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46632 \begin_inset Newline newline
46636 \begin_inset Flex URL
46639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46649 \begin_layout Bibliography
46650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46651 LatexCommand bibitem
46652 key "makeindex-man"
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46660 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46669 \begin_inset Newline newline
46673 \begin_inset Flex URL
46676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46678 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46686 \begin_layout Bibliography
46687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46688 LatexCommand bibitem
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46696 name "Documentation"
46697 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46706 \begin_inset Newline newline
46710 \begin_inset Flex URL
46713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46715 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46723 \begin_layout Bibliography
46724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46725 LatexCommand bibitem
46731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46733 name "Documentation"
46734 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46738 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46740 \begin_inset Newline newline
46744 \begin_inset Flex URL
46747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46749 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46757 \begin_layout Bibliography
46758 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46759 LatexCommand bibitem
46765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46767 name "Documentation"
46768 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46772 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46778 \begin_inset Index idx
46781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46783 -packages ! caption
46789 \begin_inset Newline newline
46793 \begin_inset Flex URL
46796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46798 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46806 \begin_layout Bibliography
46807 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46808 LatexCommand bibitem
46814 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46816 name "Documentation"
46817 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46821 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46827 \begin_inset Index idx
46830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46832 -packages ! enumitem
46838 \begin_inset Newline newline
46842 \begin_inset Flex URL
46845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46847 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46855 \begin_layout Bibliography
46856 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46857 LatexCommand bibitem
46863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46865 name "Documentation"
46866 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46870 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46876 \begin_inset Index idx
46879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46881 -packages ! fancyhdr
46887 \begin_inset Newline newline
46891 \begin_inset Flex URL
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46896 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46904 \begin_layout Bibliography
46905 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46906 LatexCommand bibitem
46912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46914 name "Documentation"
46915 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46919 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46925 \begin_inset Index idx
46928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46930 -packages ! hyperref
46936 \begin_inset Newline newline
46940 \begin_inset Flex URL
46943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46953 \begin_layout Bibliography
46954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46955 LatexCommand bibitem
46961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46963 name "Documentation"
46964 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46968 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46974 \begin_inset Index idx
46977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46979 -packages ! nomencl
46985 \begin_inset Newline newline
46989 \begin_inset Flex URL
46992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46994 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47002 \begin_layout Bibliography
47003 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47004 LatexCommand bibitem
47010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47012 name "Documentation"
47013 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47017 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47023 \begin_inset Index idx
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47028 -packages ! prettyref
47034 \begin_inset Newline newline
47038 \begin_inset Flex URL
47041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47043 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47051 \begin_layout Bibliography
47052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47053 LatexCommand bibitem
47059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47061 name "Documentation"
47062 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47066 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47072 \begin_inset Index idx
47075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47077 -packages ! refstyle
47083 \begin_inset Newline newline
47087 \begin_inset Flex URL
47090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47092 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47100 \begin_layout Bibliography
47101 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47102 LatexCommand bibitem
47108 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47111 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47115 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47117 \begin_inset Newline newline
47121 \begin_inset Flex URL
47124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47126 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47134 \begin_layout Bibliography
47135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47136 LatexCommand bibitem
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47145 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47149 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47151 \begin_inset Newline newline
47155 \begin_inset Flex URL
47158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47160 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47168 \begin_layout Bibliography
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47170 LatexCommand bibitem
47176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47179 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47183 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47184 for Cyrillic languages:
47185 \begin_inset Newline newline
47189 \begin_inset Flex URL
47192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47194 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47202 \begin_layout Bibliography
47203 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47204 LatexCommand bibitem
47210 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47213 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47217 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47219 \begin_inset Newline newline
47223 \begin_inset Flex URL
47226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47228 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47236 \begin_layout Bibliography
47237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47238 LatexCommand bibitem
47244 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47247 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47251 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47253 \begin_inset Newline newline
47257 \begin_inset Flex URL
47260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47270 \begin_layout Bibliography
47271 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47272 LatexCommand bibitem
47278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47281 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47285 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47287 \begin_inset Newline newline
47291 \begin_inset Flex URL
47294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47296 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47304 \begin_layout Bibliography
47305 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47306 LatexCommand bibitem
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47315 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47319 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47321 \begin_inset Newline newline
47325 \begin_inset Flex URL
47328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47330 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47338 \begin_layout Bibliography
47339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47340 LatexCommand bibitem
47346 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47349 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47353 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47355 \begin_inset Newline newline
47359 \begin_inset Flex URL
47362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47364 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47372 \begin_layout Bibliography
47373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47374 LatexCommand bibitem
47380 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47383 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47387 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47389 \begin_inset Newline newline
47393 \begin_inset Flex URL
47396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47398 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47406 \begin_layout Bibliography
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47408 LatexCommand bibitem
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47417 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47421 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47423 \begin_inset Newline newline
47427 \begin_inset Flex URL
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47440 \begin_layout Bibliography
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47442 LatexCommand bibitem
47448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47451 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47455 about new features in
47461 \begin_inset Newline newline
47465 \begin_inset Flex URL
47468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47470 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47478 \begin_layout Standard
47479 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47513 \begin_inset Note Note
47516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47523 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47524 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47525 bibliography is the second one:
47533 \begin_layout Standard
47534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47535 LatexCommand bibtex
47536 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47537 options "biblio/alphadin"
47544 \begin_layout Standard
47545 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47549 \begin_layout Standard
47550 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47551 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47557 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47558 LatexCommand printindex